2020 BMW 5 Series 2

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
OWNER'S MANUAL.
THE BMW 5 SERIES PLUG-IN HYBRID.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402913849 - X/19

WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
BMW 5 Series Plug-In Hybrid.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining
the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐
board literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 6
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ............................................................................................................................ 14
Set-up and use ............................................................................................................... 18
On the road ...................................................................................................................... 22
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 30
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state ..................................................... 35
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 38
BMW Gesture Control .................................................................................................. 47
Voice activation system ............................................................................................... 50
General settings ............................................................................................................. 54
Personal settings ........................................................................................................... 58
Connections .................................................................................................................... 62
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 70
BMW eDRIVE ................................................................................................................. 72
Safety of the hybrid system ........................................................................................ 74
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 76
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ......................................................................... 101
Transporting children safely ..................................................................................... 115
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 120
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 140
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 161
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 168
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 200
Driver assistance systems ........................................................................................ 204
4
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 240
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 241
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 255
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 265
Cargo area ..................................................................................................................... 270
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 276
Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 281
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle ................................................................................................... 286
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 299
Fuel .................................................................................................................................. 302
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 304
Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 332
Engine oil ....................................................................................................................... 335
Coolant ........................................................................................................................... 339
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 341
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 343
Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 351
Care ................................................................................................................................. 358
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 364
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 366
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 368
© 2019 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 X/19, 11 19 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
Orientation The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
lar topic is by using the index.
played on the Control Display. Additional
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in information, refer to page 70.
the first chapter.
BMW Driver’s Guide app
Updates made after the editorial The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
deadline scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones
ences may exist between the printed Owner's and tablets.
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle. BMW Driver’s Guide Web
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. formation for the selected vehicle. If possible,
only equipment and functions that are actually in‐
Owner's Manual for Navigation, stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s
Entertainment, Communication Guide Web can be displayed in any current
browser.
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a
printed book from the service center.
Symbols and displays
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Additional sources of Symbol Meaning
information Precautions that must be followed in

order to avoid the possibility of injury
to yourself and to others as well as
Service center serious damage to the vehicle.
A service center will be glad to answer questions
at any time. Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
Internet "..." Texts in vehicle used to select
Vehicle information and general information on individual functions.
BMW, for instance, on technology, are available
on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
6
Information NOTES
Symbol Meaning Vehicle features and

›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the options
voice activation system.
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice
all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
activation system.
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐
fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐
Action steps lustrates features and functions that are not
Action steps to be carried out are presented as a available in a vehicle, for example because of the
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in selected optional features or the country-specific
the defined order. version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
1. First action step.
systems.
2. Second action step.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
Enumerations served.
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐ For any options and equipment not described in
native possibilities are presented as a list with this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary
bullet points. Owner's Manuals.
▷ First possibility. Your BMW service center is happy to answer any
▷ Second possibility. questions that you may have about the features
and options applicable to your vehicle.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the
Status of the Owner's
component is available in the Owner's Manual. Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived to
ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate that
incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or of or‐ Updates made after the editorial
ange-colored high-voltage components results deadline
in the risk of life-threatening injury from electric
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
shock.
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle.
7
NOTES Information
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix Manual as "another qualified service center or re‐
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. pair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐
For Your Own Safety quent damage and related safety risks.
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint
Intended use can lead to a failure or malfunction of compo‐
Heed the following when using the vehicle: nents, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result
in a safety risk.
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
Parts and accessories
stickers.
BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
▷ Technical vehicle data.
sory products approved by BMW.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
vehicle is driven.
their use and installation are available from a
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents. BMW center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
Warranty BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐ cles.
erating conditions and registration requirements BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
applying in the country of first delivery, also sories.
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be
BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
operated in a different country it might be neces‐
product from another manufacturer can be used
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing
with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
operating conditions and registration require‐
hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the
was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether
homologation requirements in a certain country
these products are suitable for BMW vehicles
you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for
under all usage conditions.
your vehicle there. Further information on war‐
ranty is available from a service center.
California Proposition 65
Maintenance and repairs Warning
Advanced technology, for instance the use of For vehicles sold in California, the law requires
modern materials and high-performance elec‐ vehicle manufacturers to provide the following
tronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair warning:
work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends Warning
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐
BMW center. If you choose to use another serv‐ bile components and parts, including compo‐
ice facility, BMW recommends use of a facility nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair, cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
according to BMW specifications with properly State of California to cause cancer and birth
trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
8
Information NOTES
products of component wear contain or emit Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
chemicals known to the State of California to Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ designed to meet the particular operating condi‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ tions and homologation requirements in your
pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals country and continental region in order to deliver
known to the State of California to cause can‐ the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐ ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
gine oil contains chemicals that have caused ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
water. For more information go to mologation requirements. You should also be
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. aware of any applicable warranty limitations or
exclusions for such country or region. In such
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
Warning ther information.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can Maintenance
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐ Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
which are known to the State of California to Limited Warranty.
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
Specifications for maintenance measures:
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system.
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash US models.
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐ ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
hicle. For more information go to Canadian models.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly
maintained, this could result in serious damage
to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by
Service and warranty
the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
We recommend that you read this publication
Refer to chapter engine oil change regarding
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐
recommended service intervals for oil changes.
ing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Data memory
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. General information
▷ California Emission Control System Limited Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐
Warranty. hicle. Electronic control units process data they
receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or
Detailed information about these warranties is
exchange with each other. Some control units
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or
9
NOTES Information
provide assistance during driving, for instance ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐
units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions. ment of the driving stability control systems.
Information about stored or exchanged data can ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐ The data is required to perform the control unit
cle, in a separate booklet, for example. functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recog‐
nize and correct malfunctions, and helps the ve‐
Personal reference hicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle The majority of this data is volatile and is only
identification number. Depending on the country, processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small
the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐ share of the data is stored event-related in event
cle identification number, license plate and corre‐ or fault memories.
sponding authorities. In addition, there are other When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐
options to track data collected in the vehicle to ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐
the driver or vehicle owner, for instance, via the ance measures, this technical information can be
ConnectedDrive account that is used. read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐
cle identification number.
Operating data in the vehicle A dealer’s service center or another qualified
Control units process data to operate the vehicle. service center or repair shop can read out the in‐
For example, this includes: formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational out the data.
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse The data is collected, processed, and used by
acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator. the relevant organizations in the service network.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain The data documents technical conditions of the
sensor signals. vehicle, helps with the identification of the fault,
compliance with warranty obligations and quality
The processed data is only processed in the ve‐ improvement.
hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not
stored beyond the operating period. Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with product lia‐
Electronic components, e.g. control units and ig‐ bility law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle man‐
nition keys, contain components for storing tech‐ ufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle.
nical information. Information about the vehicle The data from the vehicle can also be used to
condition, component usage, maintenance re‐ check customer claims for warranty and guar‐
quirements events or faults can be stored tem‐ anty.
porarily or permanently.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be
This information generally records the state of a reset when a dealer’s service center or another
component, a module, a system, or the environ‐ qualified service center or repair shop performs
ment, for instance: repair or servicing work.
▷ Operating states of system components, for
instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐
tery status.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
components, for instance lights and brakes.
10
Information NOTES
Data entry and data transfer into ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐
the vehicle pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐
cludes, for instance position data and other
general vehicle information. This optimizes the
General information
way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort tion or music playback, work.
and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐
There is no further interaction between the mo‐
cle and modified or reset at any time.
bile device and the vehicle, such as active access
For example, this includes: to vehicle data.
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐ How the data will be processed further is deter‐
tions. mined by the provider of the particular app being
▷ Suspension and climate control settings. used. The extent of the possible settings de‐
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐ pends on the respective app and the operating
tertainment and communication system of the system of the mobile device.
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the re‐ Services
spective equipment:
General information
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
system. this enables data to be exchanged between the
vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with
connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
an integrated hands-free system or an
ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
integrated navigation system.
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
▷ Entered navigation destinations. phones. This wireless network connection
▷ Data on the use of Internet services. enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is clude online services and apps supplied by the
found on a device that has been connected to vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it Services from the vehicle
can be deleted at any time. manufacturer
This data is only transmitted to third parties upon Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐
personal request as part of the use of online turer are concerned, the corresponding functions
services. The transmission depends on the se‐ are described in the appropriate place, for in‐
lected settings for the use of the services. stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's
website. The relevant legal information pertaining
Incorporation of mobile devices to data protection is provided there too. Personal
data may be used to perform online services.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐
Data is exchanged over a secure connection,
vices connected to the vehicle, for instance
for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
manufacturer intended for this purpose.
control elements.
Any collection, processing, and use of personal
The sound and picture from the mobile device
data above and beyond that needed to provide
can be played back and displayed through the
the services must always be based on a legal
multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐
permission, contractual arrangement or consent.
11
NOTES Information
It is also possible to activate or deactivate the tions and no personal data, for instance name,
data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐ gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
ception of functions and services required by law However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
such as Assist systems. ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
Services from other providers during a crash investigation.
When using online services from other providers, To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
vant provider and subject to their data privacy EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐ facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐ that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
changed during this process. Information on the formation if they have access to the vehicle or
way in which personal data is collected and used the EDR.
in relation to services from third parties, the
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
tained from the relevant service provider. Vehicle identification
number
Event Data Recorder EDR
Engine compartment
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
The vehicle identification number can be found
such data as:
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐ side of the vehicle.
erating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
12
Information NOTES
Windshield You can also obtain other information about mo‐

tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
The vehicle identification number can also be

found behind the windshield.
iDrive
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐
tion number via iDrive, refer to page 63.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590.
13
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Entering
Opening and closing Locking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Buttons on the vehicle key
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking

system
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the trunk lid
With automatic tailgate operation: opening
the trunk lid
4 Press and hold or press three times in quick Buttons for the central locking system.
succession: panic mode
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
Locking
Pressing the button locks the vehicle if
Unlocking the vehicle the front doors are closed.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Unlocking
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐ Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle.
locked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the
Panic mode
other vehicle access points. You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐
cle key after unlocking. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened,
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
as long as the button on the vehicle key is
three times in succession.
pressed.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
14
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access Opening and closing the trunk lid

with no-touch activation
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operating Concept
the vehicle key. The trunk lid can be opened and closed with no-
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your touch activation using the vehicle key you are
pants pocket, is sufficient. carrying.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key Performing the foot movement
when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐
rior. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
Unlocking the vehicle
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Trunk lid
Opening
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

on the outside of the trunk lid.
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐

hicle key for approx. 1 second.
15
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Depending on the setting, the doors may also Driver's door

be unlocked.
Without automatic tailgate

operation: closing
Close the trunk lid manually.
With automatic tailgate operation:

closing
Press the button on the inside of the
trunk lid. 1 Exterior mirrors
2 Power windows
3 Safety switch
Displays and control 4 Seats, comfort features
elements 5 Central locking system
6 Opening the trunk lid
In the vicinity of the steering 7 Tank vent
wheel
Switch console
1 Light switch element

2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
1 Selector lever/gearshift lever
3 Instrument cluster
2 Controller
4 Wipers
3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
5 Start/Stop button
4 ▷ eDrive
▷ Parking assistance systems
Indicator/warning lights 5 Driving Dynamics Control
Instrument cluster
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tioning and light up temporarily when the engine
is started or standby state is switched on.
16
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
iDrive Terminating the voice activation

system
Concept Press the button on the steering wheel
The iDrive combines the functions of many or ›Cancel‹.
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main menu.

Press twice: displays all menu items
of the main menu.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Press once: opens the previous dis‐

play.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
Opens the Options menu.
Voice activation
Activating the voice activation

system
1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐
vation system is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate the

function via iDrive.
17
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steering Adjusting the distance: manual head
restraints
wheel
Electrically adjustable seats
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐

straint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
1 Thigh support front.
2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
3 Upper backrest Adjusting the distance: power head
4 Backrest width restraints
5 Lumbar support The head restraint is automatically repositioned
6 Backrest tilt, head restraint when the upper backrest is adjusted.
Side extensions
Adjusting the head restraint
Adjusting the height: power head

restraints
Fold the side extensions forward to increase lat‐

eral support.
Push switch up or down.
18
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Adjusting the exterior mirrors Storing

1. Set the desired position.
2. Press button on the door. The writ‐

ing on the button lights up.
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 at the door
while the writing is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Infotainment
Radio
Adjusting the steering wheel
Electrical steering wheel adjustment
1 Changing the entertainment source

2 CD/DVD drive
Move the steering wheel to the preferred height 3 Eject CD/DVD
and angle to suit your seating position by press‐ 4 Changing the station/track
ing the switch. 5 Programmable memory buttons
6 Sound output on/off, volume
Memory function 7 Waveband/satellite radio
Changing the waveband
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function: Navigation destination entry
▷ Seat position.
Entering a destination via address
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position. State/province
▷ Height of the Head-up Display. 1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
19
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
3. "State/Province?" 5. Select the functions for which the mobile

4. Select the country from the list. phone is to be used.
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
Entering the address the Control Display.
The address can be entered in any order. 6. To perform additional steps on the mobile
Example: entering the address via the town/city phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's
manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐
1. "City/Postal code?" tooth device or a new device.
2. Enter the town/city. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
The list is narrowed down further with each on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐
entry. tooth name of the vehicle.
3. Select the symbol. 7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
4. Select a town/city from the list. number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
5. If necessary, enter the street.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
6. Select the street as you would the town/city. on the Control Display with the control
7. If necessary, enter a house number. number on the display of the device.
8. Select the symbol. Confirm the control number on the device
9. Select a house number or range of house and on the Control Display.
numbers from the list. ▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
ber on the device and via iDrive.
Starting destination guidance The device is connected and displayed in the
"Start guidance" device list.
If only the town/city was entered: destination
guidance is started to the town/city center. Using the phone
Connecting a mobile phone Accepting a call

Incoming calls can be answered in several ways.
General information ▷ Via iDrive:
After the mobile phone is connected once to the "Accept"
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using
iDrive and the steering wheel buttons. ▷ /
Press the corresponding button on the steer‐
Connecting the mobile phone via
ing wheel.
Bluetooth
▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster:
Via iDrive:
Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
1. "My Vehicle" select: "Accept"
2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Via gestures: point the index finger into the
3. "Mobile devices" direction of the Control Display.
4. "Connect new device"
20
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Dialing a number Select CarPlay as the function:

1. "Communication" "Apple CarPlay"
2. "Dial number" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
3. Enter the numbers. played in the device list.
4. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐

tablished via the mobile phone to which this
function has been assigned.
Establish the connection via the additional
phone:
1. Press the button.

2. "Call via"
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
21
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
On the road
Driving The LED on the switch and the indicator light in
the instrument cluster are illuminated.
Drive-ready state
Releasing
Switching on drive-ready state With drive-ready state switched on:
Steptronic transmission: press the switch
while the brake is pressed or selector lever posi‐
tion P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Drive-ready state is activated:
Steptronic transmission: parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the vehi‐
▷ Starting of combustion engine.
cle is being held by Automatic Hold and the
▷ Drive-ready state for electric driving without drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is
starting the engine. exited.
Switching off drive-ready state Steptronic transmission

Steptronic transmission:
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ Engaging selector lever position D,
hicle stopped. N, R
The engine is switched off.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the combustion engine
when conditions for electric driving have been
met. The standby state remains on. READY is ▷ Drive mode D.
displayed in the instrument cluster. If necessary,
the combustion engine starts automatically. ▷ Neutral N.
▷ R is reverse.
Parking brake With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push
the selector lever in the desired direction, past a
Setting resistance point, if needed. The selector lever re‐
turns to the center position in each case.
Pull the switch.
22
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you Steptronic transmission, Sport
select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure program and manual mode
on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent
shifting to selector lever position R or the inad‐
vertent shifting from selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Releasing the selector lever lock
Activate the Sport program/manual mode:

Press the selector lever to the left from selector
lever position D.
Manual mode:
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
Press the button. End the sport program/manual mode:

Push the selector lever to the right.
Engaging P
Engage selector lever position P only when the High beams, headlight flasher,
vehicle is stationary. turn signal
High beams, headlight flasher
Press button P.
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
23
Turn signal Symbol Function
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.

▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point
Wiper system
in the opposite direction.
Switching the wipers on/off and
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
brief wipe
lever up or down.
▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐ Switching on
ance point and hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to flash.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.

Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
Night vision. ▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
Lights off.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight control.

Adaptive light functions.
Low beams.
24
Brief wipe and switching off Adjusting the sensitivity
Press the lever down. Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position. Cleaning the windshield
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
Climate control
Automatic climate control
To activate: press the lever up once from its
standard position, arrow 1.
Button Function
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position. Temperature.
Climate control operation.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
25
Button Function Refueling

Recirculated-air mode.
Charging the vehicle
Air flow, manual.
Connecting
Air distribution, manual. To connect, engage selector lever in position P
and unlock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if
needed.
SYNC program.
1. To open the charging socket flap, press on
the rear edge, arrow. The charging socket
Defrost and defog window.
flap opens.
Rear window defroster.
Active seat ventilation.
Seat heating.
Opening the Climate menu.

For the following settings, for in‐
2. Remove the cover of the charging cable plug,
stance: upper body temperature
if needed.
adjustment, parked-car ventila‐
tion. 3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
to the port on the charging station.
4. Insert the appropriate charging cable plug,
and push it in until it engages.
Removing
When the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is
locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the
cable.
If necessary, clean the area between the charg‐
ing socket flap and charging socket, for instance
from snow, before removing it.
1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key if it is
locked.
Charging cable is unlocked.
2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the
gripping areas.
26
Charging process is interrupted. When tank venting has finished, a message is

displayed in the instrument cluster. The fuel
cap is released for opening.
3. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap
after tank venting, press the button again.
If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler
flap even after pressing the button again, un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually.
3. Remove the charging cable from the charg‐
ing socket, arrow 2. Fuel cap
If the charging cable cannot be pulled off, un‐ 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
lock the charging socket manually. edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
4. Put the charging socket lid back on.
5. Press on the charging socket flap until it en‐
gages.
6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if
needed.
7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the
from the port on the charging station as appli‐
cable.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
8. Stow the charging cable.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
At a charging station, insert the permanently
the fuel filler flap.
installed charging cable in the place provided
for it.
Gasoline
Refueling For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Venting the tank Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
Excess pressure may build up in the fuel tank as taining metal must not be used.
a result of gasoline vapors; this pressure is dissi‐
pated before the fuel cap is opened. Wheels and tires
The button is located on the driver's floor area.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
1. Switch off drive-ready state. The tire inflation pressure specifications can be
found in the tire inflation pressure table in the
2. Press the button to start the pressure printed Owner's Manual.
equalization.
The tank venting status is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster. In rare cases, tank venting
can last several minutes.
27
After correcting the tire inflation Adding engine oil

pressure
With runflat tires: General information
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
state before adding engine oil.
With Tire Pressure Monitor TPM:
The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied Adding
automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐
tings have been made.
With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐
sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month. Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip. played in the instrument cluster.
Cleaning the wheels Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐

sage.
The friction during hard braking may produce
brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust Take care not to add too much engine oil.
can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW rec‐ Observe recommended engine oil types.
ommends using vehicle care and cleaning prod‐
ucts from BMW.
Providing assistance
Electronic oil measurement
Hazard warning flashers
Requirements
Depending on the previous displays, the status
display appears when the engine is running or af‐
ter the vehicle has been driven for at least 30 mi‐
nutes.
Displaying the engine oil level

Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
The button is located in the center console.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐
play depending on the engine oil level. Pay atten‐
tion to these messages.
28
Breakdown assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance

Via iDrive:
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established to BMW
Roadside Assistance.
ConnectedDrive
Concierge service
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Assist Response Center.
Via iDrive:
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
A voice connection to the Concierge service is
established.
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Depending on the equipment version, Teleservi‐
ces comprise the following services:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Service Request.
▷ Teleservice Report.
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.
29
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also
options applies to safety-related functions and systems.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. served.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Roller sunblind in the rear win‐ Memory function 111

dow 97
2 Safety switch 97 Massage function 111
3 Power windows 96 6 Lights

Front fog lights 165
4 Exterior mirror operation 108

Night Vision 182
5 Seating comfort features
30
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Light switch 161 Cruise control on/off 204
Lights off Active Cruise Control on/off 207

Daytime running lights 163
Parking lights 161 Steering and traffic jam assistant
on/off 214
Automatic headlight control 162 Cruise control: to store the speed

Adaptive light functions 163
High-beam Assistant 163 Pause or continue cruise control
Low beams 162
Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐

Instrument lighting 165 tance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐

Right roadside parking light 162 tance
With steering and traffic jam assis‐

Left roadside parking light 162 tant: adjust distance
Cruise control rocker switch

7 Central locking system 10 Instrument cluster 140
Unlocking 86 11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Changing the station/track, see
Locking 86 Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 6
Entertainment source, see Owner's
8 Steering column stalk, left Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
Turn signal 129 ment and Communication 6
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
High beams, head‐ Communication 6
light flasher 129
Voice activation system 50
High-beam Assistant 163
Telephone, see Owner's Manual

Onboard Computer 154 for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 153
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
12 Steering column stalk, right
31
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Wipers 130 16 Adjusting the steering wheel 110
Rain sensor 131 17 Unlocking the hood 333
Cleaning the windshield and head‐

18 Opening/closing trunk lid 91
lights 131
13 Switching drive-ready state on/

19 Tank vent 299
off 120
14 Horn, entire surface

20 Glove compartment 266
15 Heated steering wheel 110
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 40
2 Ventilation 245
32
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
3 Hazard warning system 351 10 Driving Dynamics Control 138

SPORT driving mode
Intelligent Safety 172 COMFORT driving mode
4 Glove compartment 265 ECO PRO driving mode

5 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐ ADAPTIVE driving mode
tion 6
6 Automatic climate control 241
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
7 Controller with buttons 40 trol 200
8 Parking brake 126
11 Steptronic transmission selector lever 134
Automatic Hold 127
9 eDRIVE 122
PDC Park Distance Control 218

Without Surround View: rearview
camera 223
Surround View 225
Cross traffic warning 237
Parking assistant 232
Surround View: Panorama
View 225
33
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 353 4 Reading lights 166
2 Glass sunroof 98 5 Interior lights 165
3 Indicator light, front-seat passenger

airbag 171
34
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state AT A GLANCE
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready

state
Vehicle features and Safety information
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
cific and optional features offered with the series. possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the ing.
selected options or country versions. This also In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
applies to safety-related functions and systems. against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
served. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
General information ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one wheel chock.
of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state. Warning
▷ Drive-ready state. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle

can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
Idle state following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Concept ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
off. All power consumers are deactivated. dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
General information ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
the outside and after exiting and locking. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
35
AT A GLANCE Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state
Automatic idle state Standby state

The idle state is automatically established under
the following conditions:
Concept
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
When standby state is switched on, most func‐
place on the vehicle.
tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary.
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is Desired settings can be adjusted.
low.
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one of General information
the front doors is opened when exiting the The vehicle is in the standby state after the front
vehicle. doors are opened from the outside.
The idle state is not automatically established
while a phone call is active. Display in the instrument cluster
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
Establishing idle state when
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
opening the front doors switched off and standby state
Via iDrive: switched on.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key" Drive-ready state
4. "Turn off after door opening"
Concept
Manual idle state Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
To establish idle state in the vehicle after end of starting the engine.
trip:
General information
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability
Control, can only be used with drive-ready state
switched on.
Follow further information on the drive-ready
state, refer to page 120.
Switching on drive-ready state

Drive-ready state is switched on
Press and hold the button until via the Start/Stop button:
the OFF indicator on the instru‐
ment cluster goes out.

36
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state AT A GLANCE
Display in the instrument cluster

When the drive-ready state is
switched on, READY is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Switching off drive-ready state

Press the Start/Stop button to switch off drive-
ready state. The vehicle switches into standby
state.
37
AT A GLANCE iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and Input and display
options
Letters and numbers
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Letters and numbers can be entered using the
cific and optional features offered with the series. Controller or the touchscreen. The keyboard's
It also describes features that are not necessarily display changes automatically.
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the
selected options or country versions. This also Symbol Function
applies to safety-related functions and systems. or Change between capital and
When using these functions and systems, the lower-case letters.
served. Insert blank space.
Use voice activation.

Concept Confirm entry.
The iDrive combines the functions of many

Entry comparison
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller. When entering names and addresses, the choice
is narrowed down with every letter entered and
letters may be added automatically.
Safety information Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry for
Warning which data is available.
Operating the integrated information systems ▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
and communication devices while driving can tered in all languages that are available in
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control iDrive.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐ Activating/deactivating the
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
functions
tionary. Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
38
iDrive AT A GLANCE
Status information Entertainment
General information Symbol Meaning

The status field can be found in the upper area of Bluetooth audio.
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols. USB audio interface.
WiFi.
Status field symbols
Other symbols
Radio
Symbol Meaning
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
HD Radio station is being received.
The sound output has been
Satellite radio is switched on.
switched off.
Telephone Request for the current vehicle posi‐

tion.
Symbol Meaning Checking the current vehicle posi‐
Incoming or outgoing call. tion.
Missed call.
Split screen, split screen display
Signal strength of cellular network.
General information
Network search.
Additional information, for instance information
Cellular network is not available. from the Onboard Computer can be displayed in
The critical charge state of the mo‐ several menus on the right side of the split
bile phone has been reached. screen display, referred to as the split screen.
The additional information remains visible even
Roaming is active. when switching to another menu on the split
SMS text message received. screen.
Message received. Switching on/off

Reminder.
Sending not possible.
2. "Split screen"
Contacts are being loaded.
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus which
support the split screen function.
1. Move the Controller to the right until the split

screen is selected.
39
AT A GLANCE iDrive
2. Press the Controller. Safety information

3. Select the desired setting.
NOTICE
Specifying the number of displays
Objects in the area in the front of the Control
It is possible to specify the number of displays. Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
1. Move the Controller to the right until the split play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
screen is selected. not place objects in the area in front of the
Control Display.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting. Switching on/off automatically
5. Move the Controller to the left. The Control Display is switched on automatically
after unlocking.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
Control elements switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
Overview minutes.
Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.

2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
1 Control Display, with touchscreen depending
on the equipment version Controller with navigation
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on system
the equipment version, with touchpad
General information
Control Display The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
General information menu items and enter the settings.
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐ Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
structions, refer to page 361. touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 45.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
Operation
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down ▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature ample.
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
40
iDrive AT A GLANCE
Button Function
Opens navigation map.
Opens destination input menu for

navigation.

play.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
Controller without navigation

system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐ rectly. The Controller can be used to select
plays, for example. menu items and enter the settings.
Operation
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
ample.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main menu. ▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.
of the main menu.
Opens the Communication menu.
41
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Operating via the

Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
▷ Tilt in two directions to switch between dis‐

plays, for example.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Buttons on the Controller Adjusting the main menu

Button Function 1. Press the button twice.
Press once: calls up the main menu. All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
of the main menu. 2. Select a menu item.
3. To move the menu item to the desired posi‐
tion, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Opens the Communication menu. Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.
play. 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
42
iDrive AT A GLANCE
2. Press the Controller. ▷ If applicable, further operating options for the

selected menu, for instance "Save station".
Dynamic contents
You can display dynamic contents within the Changing settings
menu items. The contents of the menu items Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.
update automatically, e.g., the active destination Via iDrive:
guidance in the navigation. To access the dy‐
namic content directly, tap on the lower section 1. "My Vehicle"
of the menu item. 2. "iDrive settings"
Via iDrive: 3. "Displays"
1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Control display"
2. "Contents of main menu" 5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
Changing between displays displayed.
After a menu item is selected, for instance 7. Press the Controller.
"iDrive settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left. Entering letters and numbers
The current display closes and the previous
display is shown. Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letter or number.
▷ Press the button. 2. : confirm entry.
The previous display re-opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right. Deleting
The new display opens.
Symbol Function
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened. Press the Controller: delete letter or
number.
Opening recently used menus Hold the Controller down: delete all
Press and hold this button. letters or numbers.
The recently used menus are displayed. Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
Opening the Options menu the letters for which there is an entry are dis‐
played at the left edge.
Press the button.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
The "Options" menu is displayed. All letters for which there are entries are dis‐
The menu consists of various areas: played on the left edge.
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen". 2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
▷ Control options for the selected main menu, The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
for instance for "Media/Radio". played.
43
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Operation via touchscreen Dynamic contents

You can display dynamic contents within the
menu items. The contents of the menu items
General information
update automatically, e.g., the active destination
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐ guidance in the navigation. To access the dy‐
screen. namic content directly, tap on the lower section
Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not use of the menu item.
any objects. Via iDrive:
Opening the main menu 1. "My Vehicle"
Tap on the symbol. 2. "Contents of main menu"
Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap arrow.
The new display opens.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main Changing settings
menu.
Settings such as brightness can be changed via
the touchscreen.
Adjusting the main menu
Via iDrive:
1. Tap on the symbol.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
played. 2. "iDrive settings"
2. Drag the menu item to the desired position 3. "Displays"
on the right or left. 4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
Selecting menu items
6. To perform the desired setting:
Tap the desired menu item.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on the symbol.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.
A keyboard appears in the Control Display.
44
iDrive AT A GLANCE
2. Enter letters and numbers. Entering letters and numbers

Entering letters requires some practice at the be‐
Deleting ginning. When entering, pay attention to the fol‐
lowing:
Symbol Function
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
Tapping the symbol: deletes the let‐ and lower-case letters and numbers. To
ter or number. make entries, you may need to change be‐
tween upper and lower-case letters, numbers
Tapping and holding the symbol all
and characters, refer to page 43.
letters: deletes all letters or numbers.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
Control Display.
Operating navigation map
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
The navigation map can be moved using the accents or periods so that the letter can be
touchscreen. clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
Function Operation mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the Control‐
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin‐ ler.
map. gers.
Entering special characters
Touchpad Input Operation
Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the

General information ter. touchpad.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the
touchpad on the Controller.
space. center of the touchpad.
Selecting functions Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐

Via iDrive: per area of the touchpad.
1. "My Vehicle" Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the

score. lower area of the touchpad.
3. "Touchpad"
Using the map
4. Select the desired setting:
The map in the navigation system can be moved
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers. via the touchpad.
▷ "Map": use the map.
Function Operation
▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐
lecting the list field. Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers. Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐
map. pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
45
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries or
pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual.
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Storing a function
1. Select function via iDrive.
2. Press and hold the desired button

until a signal sounds.
Executing a function
Press the button.
The function will work immediately. This means,

for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments

1. Press and hold buttons 1 and simultane‐
ously for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
46
BMW Gesture Control AT A GLANCE
BMW Gesture Control

Vehicle features and The gestures that are performed underneath the
interior mirror are captured by a camera in the
options roofliner.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐

cific and optional features offered with the series. Activating/deactivating
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the Via iDrive:
applies to safety-related functions and systems. 1. "My Vehicle"
When using these functions and systems, the 2. "iDrive settings"
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 3. "Gestures"
served.
4. "Gesture control"
Concept Adjusting
Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand
Via iDrive:
motion only using BMW Gesture Control.
1. "My Vehicle"
Overview 3. "Gestures"
▷ "Display tips": the possible gesture is
shown on the Control Display.
▷ "Audio feedback": an acoustic signal is
emitted once the gesture is recognized.
47
AT A GLANCE BMW Gesture Control
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the di‐ Accept call.
rection of the screen. Select a highlighted entry in a list
during voice activation.
Confirm "Resume guidance"
pop-up.
Move hand across the width of the Control Dis‐ Reject call.
play in the direction of the front-passenger side. Close pop-up.
Terminate voice activation.
Slowly move hand clockwise in a circular pattern Increase the volume.

with the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a circu‐ Reduce the volume.

lar pattern with the index finger stretched out for‐
ward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move Surround View: turn camera view.
hand horizontally to the right or left. This gesture can only be exe‐
cuted while the vehicle is station‐
ary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger for‐ Individually assignable gesture.
ward.
Perform gestures underneath the interior mirror Assigning gesture individually

and next to the steering wheel.
Via iDrive:
Execute gestures clearly.
1. "My Vehicle"
The gestures can also be executed from the
front-passenger side. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Gestures"
48
BMW Gesture Control AT A GLANCE
4. "Function assignment"
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera can be distur‐
bed by the following circumstances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
▷ The camera lens is dirty. Clean the camera
lenses, refer to page 361.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
tection range.
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
49
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and ▷ Always say commands in the language of the
voice activation system.
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Using the voice activation
cific and optional features offered with the series.
system
selected options or country versions. This also Activating the voice activation
applies to safety-related functions and systems. system
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 1. Press the button on the steering
served. wheel.
Concept 3. Say the command.
This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐
Most functions displayed on the Control Display vation system is active.
can be operated by voice commands via the
voice activation system. The system supports No other commands may be available. In this
you with announcements during input. case, operate the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation

General information system
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐ Press the button on the steering wheel
hicle is stationary can only be operated via or ›Cancel‹.
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐
tent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on Possible commands
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal in‐ General information
structions to use with the voice activation
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
system.
spoken as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
Functional requirements ken.
You can also select list entries such as phone list
▷ A language must be set via iDrive that is sup‐ entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
ported by the voice activation system. To set tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the re‐
the language, refer to page 54. spective list.
50
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Displaying possible commands Adjusting

The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display:
Setting the language
▷ Some possible commands for the current
The language to be used for voice activation and
menu.
system announcements can be set.
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
Via iDrive:
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition. 1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Encrypted connection is not available. 2. "iDrive settings"

3. If necessary, "Language"
Example: opening the tone 4. "Language:"
settings 5. Select the desired language.
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller. Setting the voice dialog
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if You can set the system to use standard dialog or
needed. a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
2. Press the button on the steering short messages in abbreviated form.
wheel. Via iDrive:
3. ›Media and radio‹
1. "My Vehicle"
4. ›Tone‹
Help on the voice activation 3. "Language"

system 4. "Speech mode:"
▷ To have the available spoken instructions 5. Select the desired setting.
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐ Speaking during voice output
ple of the voice activation system read out It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
loud: ›General information on voice control‹. voice activation system. The function can be de‐
▷ To have help for the current menu read out activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐
loud: ›Help‹. rupted, for instance due to background noise or
talking.
Information for Emergency Via iDrive:
Requests 1. "My Vehicle"
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate 2. "iDrive settings"
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, 3. "Language"
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a 4. "Speaking during voice output"
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 353,
close to the interior mirror.
51
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Online speech processing Activate voice command response on the smart‐

phone for this purpose.
Online speech processing provides a dictation
function, a natural method of entering destina‐
tions and improves the quality of voice recogni‐ 1. Press and hold the button on the
tion. To use the functions, data is transmitted to steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
a service provider via an encrypted connection Voice command response is activated on the
and stored locally there. smartphone.
Via iDrive:
2. Release the button.
1. "My Vehicle"
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
2. "iDrive settings" pears on the Control Display.
3. "Language" If it was not possible to activate voice command
4. "Server speech recognition" response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears
on the Control Display.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
Amazon Alexa Car
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐ Integration
ume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile Concept
currently used. Alexa is a digital assistant by Amazon. With Ama‐
zon Alexa Car Integration, Alexa can be used in
the vehicle.
System limits
General information
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead
to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and Some of the Alexa functions are limited in the ve‐
glass sunroof closed. hicle to prevent any impairment of safety while
driving.
▷ Noises from the front passenger or the rear
seat bench can impair the system. Avoid
making other noise in the vehicle while
Functional requirement
speaking. ▷ Amazon Alexa Car Integration purchased via
ConnectedDrive Store.
▷ Major language dialects can cause problems
with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud ▷ The ConnectedDrive account in the vehicle is
and clear. the same as in the BMW Connected app.
▷ The vehicle is connected in the BMW Con‐
nected app.
Using the voice activation ▷ Amazon account and BMW account are con‐
system of the smartphone nected in the BMW Connected app.
▷ The Bluetooth connection or USB connec‐
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be tion between the vehicle and the mobile de‐
used via voice activation. vice is active.
52
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Activation in the BMW

Connected app
The Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in
the BMW Connected app.
Follow the instructions in the app.
Activation in the vehicle

An authorization for the use of Amazon Alexa Car
Integration is required every time before starting
a trip.
1. Authorizing Amazon Alexa Car Integration:

▷ Pair mobile device with the vehicle via
Bluetooth.
▷ Select driver profile, refer to page 59.
2. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
4. Say activation word ›Alexa‹ and desired com‐
mand.
Information about the active function is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Malfunction
In case of a malfunction, switch off the engine
and start the engine again.
53
AT A GLANCE General settings
General settings
Vehicle features and 3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. rently used.
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the Setting the time
selected options or country versions. This also Via iDrive:
applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the 1. "My Vehicle"
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 2. "iDrive settings"
served.
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
Language 5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed.
Setting the language 6. Press the Controller.
Via iDrive: 7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
1. "My Vehicle"
3. If necessary, "Language" Setting the time format
4. "Language:" Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
3. "Date and time"
Setting the voice dialog 4. "Time format:"
For voice dialog for the voice activation system, 5. Select the desired setting.
refer to page 51. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Time Automatic time setting

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
Setting the time zone the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
Via iDrive: updated automatically.
1. "My Vehicle"
54
General settings AT A GLANCE
Via iDrive: stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐

ture.
1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive:
3. "Date and time" 1. "My Vehicle"
4. "Automatic time setting" 2. "iDrive settings"

The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 3. "Units"
rently used. 4. Select the desired menu item.
Date The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐

rently used.
Setting the date

Via iDrive: Activating/deactivating the
1. "My Vehicle" display of the current
2. "iDrive settings" vehicle position
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:" Concept
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current
displayed. vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW
Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
Setting the date format
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Date format:"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Activating/deactivating
rently used. popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
Setting the units of played automatically on the Control Display.
measurement Some of these popup windows can be activated
or deactivated.
Depending on the country version, you can set
the units of measurement for some values, for in‐
55
AT A GLANCE General settings
Via iDrive:
Messages
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" Concept
3. "Pop-ups" The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
4. Select the desired setting. ing in the vehicle in list form.
rently used. General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
Control Display ▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
Brightness ▷ Messages from, e.g., the Concierge service
Via iDrive: or the BMW Connected app.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Check Control messages.
2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Messages on service notifications.
3. "Displays" ▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.
4. "Control display" Messages are additionally displayed in the status
field.
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
Retrieving messages
ness is set.
Via iDrive:
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
rently used. 2. "iDrive settings"
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ 3. "Notifications"
ness settings may not be clearly visible. 4. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the mes‐
Selecting the contents of the sage is displayed.
main menu
You can select the displayed contents for some Deleting messages
menu items in the main menu. All messages, except Check Control messages
or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can
1. Press the button. be deleted from the list.
2. "Contents of main menu" Check Control messages or messages from the
3. Select the desired menu and the desired vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as
content. they are relevant.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Via iDrive:
rently used. 1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
56
General settings AT A GLANCE

4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Adjusting
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or prior‐
ity.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Notifications"
57
AT A GLANCE Personal settings
Personal settings
Vehicle features and Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
options
Concept
cific and optional features offered with the series. Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
It also describes features that are not necessarily sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the personal data can be permanently deleted using
selected options or country versions. This also iDrive.
When using these functions and systems, the General information
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
served. lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
Data protection ▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
Data transfer ▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music hard disk.
Concept ▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
The vehicle offers different functions, whose use ▷ Phone book.
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for
some functions. ▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
General information Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
With data transfer deactivated, the respective to 15 minutes.
function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary. Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display. Deleting data
Via iDrive: Note and follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Data privacy"
3. "Data privacy"
4. "Delete personal data"
58
Personal settings AT A GLANCE
5. "Delete personal data" to apply settings in the vehicle without changing

6. "OK" the personal driver profiles.
7. Exit and lock the vehicle.

The deletion process takes 15 minutes to com‐
plete. For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
If not all data was deleted, repeat the deletion. tected vehicle key must be clearly allocated to
the driver.
Canceling deletion
This is the case when:
Switch on the drive-ready state to cancel dele‐
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own ve‐
tion of the data.
hicle key.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
Driver profiles ▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev‐
Active driver profile
eral drivers can be stored and called up again After switching on the Control Display, the name
when required. of the active driver profile is displayed.
Select driver profile, refer to page 60.
General information As soon as the engine is started or any key is
There are three driver profiles with which per‐ pressed, the last selected display is shown on
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every vehi‐ the Control Display.
cle key has been assigned one of these driver To exit the welcome screen via iDrive:
profiles.
"OK"
If the vehicle is unlocked using a vehicle key, the
assigned personal driver profile will be activated. Adjusting
All settings stored in the driver profile are auto‐
matically applied. The settings for the following systems and func‐
tions are stored in the active driver profile. The
If several drivers use their own vehicle keys, the scope of storable settings depends on country
vehicle will apply the personal settings as it is be‐ and equipment.
ing unlocked. These settings are also restored, if
the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a ▷ Unlocking and locking.
person with a different vehicle key. ▷ Lights.
Changes to the settings are automatically stored ▷ Climate control.
in the driver profile currently activated. ▷ Radio.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive, the ▷ Instrument cluster.
settings stored in it will be applied automatically.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
The new driver profile is assigned to the vehicle
key that is currently in use. ▷ Volumes, tone.
There is an additional guest profile available that ▷ Control Display.
is not assigned to any vehicle key. It can be used ▷ TV.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
59
AT A GLANCE Personal settings
▷ Rearview camera. 3. "Drive off (guest)"

▷ Panorama View. 4. "OK"
▷ Head-up Display. The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
▷ Driving Dynamics Control. assigned to the vehicle key currently in use.
▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position, steer‐
ing wheel position.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
Both the positions saved via the seat memory
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
and the last position set are saved.
driver profiles.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Via iDrive:
▷ Night vision.
1. "My Vehicle"
Profile management 2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
Selecting a driver profile The driver profile marked with this symbol
Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a different can be renamed.
driver profile may be activated. This allows you to 4. "Change driver profile name"
call up personal vehicle settings, even if you did
not unlock the vehicle with your own vehicle key. 5. Enter profile name.
Via iDrive: 6. Select the symbol.
1. "My Vehicle" Resetting a driver profile

2. "Driver profiles" The settings of the active driver profile are reset
3. Select driver profile. to their factory settings.
4. "OK" Via iDrive:
▷ All settings stored in the selected driver pro‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
file are automatically applied.
2. "Driver profiles"
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to the
3. Select driver profile.
vehicle key being used at the time.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a dif‐
can be reset.
ferent vehicle key, this driver profile will apply
to both vehicle keys. 4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that are Exporting driver profiles
stored in none of the three personal driver pro‐ Most settings of the active driver profile can be
files. exported.
Via iDrive: Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before delivering
1. "My Vehicle"
the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver pro‐
2. "Driver profiles" files can be taken into another vehicle.
60
Personal settings AT A GLANCE
Via iDrive: ▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or

her own vehicle key, but another person is
1. "My Vehicle"
driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
3. Select driver profile. Access and has multiple vehicle keys with
The driver profile marked with this symbol him or her.
can be exported. ▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
4. "Export driver profile" locked and unlocked.
5. Select a storage device for exporting the ▷ Multiple vehicle keys are located outside of
driver profile. the vehicle.
▷ "USB device"
Select the USB storage device, as
needed, refer to page 65.
▷ Online
Via the BMW ConnectedDrive customer
portal.
Importing driver profiles

The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the imported
driver profile.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile.
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed.
▷ Online.
6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
System limits
A clear assignment between the vehicle key and
driver may not be possible in the following cases,
for example.
61
AT A GLANCE Connections
Connections
Vehicle features and Function Connec‐
tion type
options
USB storage device: USB.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Exporting and importing driver
cific and optional features offered with the series. profiles.
Performing software updates.
selected options or country versions. This also Exporting and importing stored
applies to safety-related functions and systems. trips.
When using these functions and systems, the Playing music.
Playing videos from the smart‐ USB.
served.
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
Concept Using the vehicle Internet ac‐ WiFi hot‐
cess. spot.
Various connection types are available for using
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection Using Apple CarPlay apps via Bluetooth
type to select depends on the mobile device and iDrive and voice operation. and WiFi.
the desired function.
The following connection types require one-time
pairing with the vehicle:
General information ▷ Bluetooth.
▷ WiFi hotspot.
The following overview shows possible functions
and the suitable connection types for them. The ▷ Apple CarPlay.
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐ Paired devices are automatically recognized later
vice. on and connected to the vehicle.
Function Connec‐
tion type
Safety information
Making calls via the hands-free Bluetooth.
system.
Using phone functions via iDrive. Warning
Using the smartphone Office Operating the integrated information systems

functions. and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
Playing music from the smart‐ Bluetooth or of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
phone or the audio player. USB. use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
Using compatible apps via Bluetooth or
iDrive. USB.
62
Connections AT A GLANCE
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐ ▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle, refer
tionary. to page 63, and on the device.
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may
be required on the device; refer to the own‐
Compatible devices er's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
General information
Via iDrive:
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ 1. "My Vehicle"
bluetooth. 2. "iDrive settings"
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed 3. "Mobile devices"
or deviating software versions. 4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Displaying the vehicle
identification number and Activating/deactivating
software part number telephone functions
When looking for compatible devices, you may
To use all supported functions of a mobile
have to state the vehicle identification number
phone, the following functions must be activated
and the software part number. These numbers
prior to pairing the mobile phone with the vehicle.
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Mobile devices"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
▷ "Office"
6. "System information"
Activate function to transmit short mes‐
A software update, refer to page 69, can be
sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes,
performed, if needed.
and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can
be incurred by transmitting all data to the
vehicle.
Bluetooth connection
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact pic‐
tures.
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 63, with
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Bluetooth interface.
▷ The vehicle key or BMW display key is in the
vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
63
Pairing the mobile device with ▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
the vehicle nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
Via iDrive: In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections

with other devices.
1. "My Vehicle" Delete all known Bluetooth connections from
2. "iDrive settings" the device list on the mobile phone and start
3. "Mobile devices" a new device search.
4. "Connect new device" ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or
has only a limited remaining battery life.
5. Select functions:
Charge the mobile phone.
▷ "Telephone"
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
▷ "Apps"
function anymore.
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for
the Control Display.
mobile phone operation.
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
devices in the vicinity.
ambient temperatures.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive?
on the mobile device display.
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly con‐
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
figured, for instance as Bluetooth audio de‐
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control vice.
number is displayed or the control number
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
must be entered.
phone or additional phone function.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
on the Control Display with the control
played or why are they incomplete?
number on the display of the device.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
Confirm the control number on the device
not yet complete.
and on the Control Display.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
ber on the device and via iDrive.
transmitted.
The device is connected and displayed in the
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
device list, refer to page 68.
entries with special characters.
Frequently Asked Questions ▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts

from social networks.
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite ▷ The number of phone book entries to be
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ stored is too high.
pected. ▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
In this case, the following explanations can help: stance due to stored information such as
notes.
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected? Reduce the data volume of the contact.
64
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as The following uses are possible on USB interfa‐
audio source or as telephone. ces with data transfer:
Configure the mobile phone and connect it ▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer
with the telephone or additional phone func‐ to page 59.
tion. ▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
How can the phone connection quality be im‐ ▷ Playing videos via USB video.
proved?
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on page 69.
the mobile phone, depending on the mobile
Follow the following when connecting:
phone.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
tor into the USB interface.
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console. ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless ▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
charging tray. chanical damage.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and ▷ Due to the large number of USB storage de‐
loudspeakers separately in the sound set‐ vices available on the market, it cannot be
tings. guaranteed that every device is operable on
the vehicle.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact the ▷ Do not expose USB storage devices to ex‐
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ treme environmental conditions, such as very
fied service center or repair shop. high temperatures; refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
USB connection niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
General information anteed in all cases.
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to ▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
the USB interface. data, do not charge a USB storage device via
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
▷ Mobile phones. the USB interface.
The snap-in adapter features a separate USB ▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
port that is automatically connected when a being used, settings may be required on the
compatible mobile phone is inserted. USB storage device, refer to the owner's
▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players. manual of the device.
▷ USB storage devices. Not compatible USB media:
Common file systems are supported. FAT32 ▷ USB hard drives.
and exFAT are the recommended formats. ▷ USB hubs.
A connected USB storage device will be sup‐ ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
plied with charge current via the USB interface if
the device supports this. Follow the maximum ▷ HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
charge current of the USB interface. ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
65
Functional requirement Connecting device to WiFi

Compatible device, refer to page 63, with USB hotspot
interface. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suitable
adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to 3. "Mobile devices"
page 260. 4. "Connect new device"
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐ 5. "Internet hotspot"
vice list, refer to page 68. Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
WiFi hotspot 6. Search for WiFi networks on the device. Se‐

lect network name on the device.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
General information nect.
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the hot‐
The device is displayed in the device list, refer to
spot of the vehicle at the same time.
page 68.
The initial Internet use via the hotspot requires a
registration and possibly a data volume purchase
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 63, with from a service provider.
WiFi interface.
Depending on the country version, data volume
▷ WiFi activated on the device. can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐
▷ Registration and data contract with a service vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.
provider where required. All devices connected via the hotspot use this
▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle. data volume.
▷ Standby state switched on.
Adjusting
Activating the WiFi hotspot The network name and hotspot code can be
Via iDrive: changed. In addition, the network name can be
hidden so that it cannot be found by other devi‐
1. "My Vehicle" ces.
2. "iDrive settings" Via iDrive:
3. "Mobile devices"
1. "My Vehicle"
4. "Settings"
5. "Internet hotspot"
3. "Mobile devices"

5. ▷ "Change hotspot key"
Enter the desired hotspot code.
▷ "Change hotspot name"
66
Enter the desired network name. "Apple CarPlay"

▷ "Hide hotspot" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
Activate or deactivate the function. played in the device list, refer to page 68.
6. Confirm the entry of the hotspot code or net‐

work name: Operation
Select the symbol. For more information, refer to the Integrated
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Frequently Asked Questions
Concept All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation pected.
and iDrive.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
Functional requirements The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is established,
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 63.
CarPlay can no longer be selected.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device
▷ Corresponding mobile contract. list.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are ▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
activated on the iPhone. from the list of stored vehicles under Blue‐
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: Apple tooth and under WiFi.
CarPlay preparation. ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
Switching on Bluetooth and required function is still not available: contact the
CarPlay hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐
Via iDrive: fied service center or repair shop.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" Managing mobile devices
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings" General information
5. Select the following settings: ▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
▷ "Bluetooth®" matically recognized and reconnected when
standby state is switched on.
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle af‐
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay ter recognition.
Pair the iPhone with the vehicle via Bluetooth, re‐
▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐
fer to page 64.
sary, for instance authorization; see the own‐
Select CarPlay as the function: er's manual of the device.
67
Displaying the device list Disconnecting the device

All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐ Via iDrive:
cle are displayed in the device list.
1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Mobile devices"
2. "iDrive settings" 4. Select device.
3. "Mobile devices" 5. "Disconnect device"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device is The device remains paired and can be con‐
used. nected again, refer to page 68.
Symbol Function
Connecting the device
"Telephone"
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
"Additional telephone" Via iDrive:
"Bluetooth® audio" 1. "My Vehicle"
"Apps" 2. "iDrive settings"
"Internet hotspot" 3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.
"Apple CarPlay"
5. "Connect device"
"Screen Mirroring" The functions that were assigned to the device
before disconnecting are assigned to the device
Configuring the device when it is reconnected. The functions may be
Functions can be activated or deactivated for deactivated on a device already connected.
paired and connected devices.
Via iDrive:
Deleting the device
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Mobile devices"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
If a function is assigned to a device, the function
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐ The device is disconnected and removed from
vice that is already connected and the device will the device list.
be disconnected.
Swapping the telephone and
additional phone
When a second phone is paired with the vehicle,
this phone is stored as an additional phone. The
68
assignment of phone and additional phone can Via iDrive:

be changed.
1. Store the file for the software update in the
Via iDrive: main directory of a USB flash drive.
1. "My Vehicle" 2. Connect the USB data storage to a USB in‐
2. "iDrive settings" terface.
3. "Mobile devices" 3. "My Vehicle"
4. "Settings" 4. "iDrive settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 5. "Software update"

6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
Software update 8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
General information
10. Wait for the update to complete.
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, for example mobile phones and MP3 11. "Shut down system"
players. Software updates are available for many If necessary, switch off the engine first.
of the supported devices. The vehicle is kept up-
to-date via regular vehicle software updates. Restoring the software version
Updates and associated, current information is You can restore the software to the version prior
available on the Internet: www.bmw.com/update. to the last update or to its factory settings.
The software may only be restored when the ve‐
Displaying the version of the hicle is stationary.
installed software Via iDrive:
The software version installed in the vehicle is
1. "My Vehicle"
displayed.
Via iDrive:
3. "Software update"
1. "My Vehicle"
4. "Restore software"
5. ▷ "Previous version"
3. "Software update"
The previous software version is restored.
4. "Show current version"
▷ "Default software settings"
If an update has been carried out before, select
The first software version is restored.
the desired version to display additional informa‐
tion. 6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
Updating software via USB 8. Wait for restore.
The software may only be updated when the ve‐ 9. "Shut down system"
hicle is stationary.
If necessary, switch off the engine first.
69
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and Integrated Owner's Manual
options in the vehicle
Concept
It also describes features that are not necessarily The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
selected options or country versions. This also cle.
applies to safety-related functions and systems. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed
When using these functions and systems, the on the Control Display.
served. Selecting the Owner's Manual

General information 2. "My Vehicle"
You can use the following media formats to call 3. "Owner's Manual"
up the content in the Owner's Manual: 4. Select the desired method of accessing the
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 70. contents.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, re‐

fer to page 70.
Scrolling through the Owner's
Manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
Printed Owner's Manual contents are displayed.
Concept Context help

The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐
ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐ General information
fered with the series. The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
the function that is currently selected can be dis‐
General information played directly.
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐

ment, and Communication can be obtained as a
Opening via iDrive
printed book from the service center. Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, 1. Press the button.
which are included in addition to the onboard lit‐ 2. "Owner's Manual"
erature.
70
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
Opening when a Check Control

2. Press the desired programmable
message is displayed
memory button and hold for more than 2 sec‐
Directly from the Check Control message on the onds.
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual" Executing
Press the corresponding button.
Changing between a function and
the Owner's Manual The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played at the selected entry point.
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:

2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to the

last displayed function.
5. Press the button to return to the page

of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The entry points into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 46, and called up directly.
Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
71
AT A GLANCE BMW eDRIVE
BMW eDRIVE
Vehicle features and The vehicle can be charged, refer to page 286,
via the charging socket at charging stations or
options household sockets.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Overview

served.
Hybrid system 1 Combustion engine

2 Power electronics
Concept 3 Electric motor
This BMW is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to the 4 High-voltage cables: orange
combustion engine, the vehicle features a high-
5 Auxiliary battery, combustion engine
voltage system that consists of an electric motor
and a high-voltage battery among other things. 6 High-voltage battery
The hybrid system can move the vehicle entirely 7 Charging control unit
on battery power. It can also support the com‐ 8 Charging socket
bustion engine in certain situations.
Functions while driving

General information
The vehicle does not consume any fuel while Electric driving: ePOWER
driving purely electrically. This enables environ‐
Under certain conditions, refer to page 122, the
mentally friendly driving without emissions in cer‐
vehicle is powered only by the electric motor.
tain conditions, for example, in city traffic. If the
combustion engine is used, the hybrid system
support reduces fuel consumption even further. Assistance from the electric motor
In addition to this, the electric motor acts as an Driving off and accelerating require a lot of en‐
alternator: during braking and coasting, the elec‐ ergy.
tric motor converts the vehicle's kinetic energy To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuel con‐
into electrical energy. The electrical energy is sumption, the electric motor boosts the combus‐
stored in the high-voltage battery and is used to tion engine, refer to page 125. To do this, the
drive the electric motor. electric motor uses the energy saved in the high-
voltage battery.
72
BMW eDRIVE AT A GLANCE
Driving with the combustion engine: can be can be cooled or heated in advance of
POWER the trip, refer to page 253.
The combustion engine, refer to page 125, pro‐ The stationary climate control, refer to
vides the main drive power to move the vehicle. If page 251, can also be switched on directly.
required, the high-voltage battery is charged at
the same time. Display
The hybrid system always starts the combustion The displays of the hybrid system, refer to
engine automatically. page 142, provide information about the current
state of hybrid operation and show the system
Auto Start/Stop function, coasting activity in a chart.
The Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 122,
switches the combustion engine off while the ve‐ Energy-saving driving
hicle is moving, when braking, when rolling to a To save energy while driving, read the following
halt, and while the vehicle is stopped. The condi‐ descriptions:
tion of rolling with the combustion engine ▷ Saving fuel, refer to page 281.
switched off is referred to as coasting. Conven‐
ience functions such as the automatic climate ▷ Using the hybrid system efficiently, refer to
control are supplied by the high-voltage battery page 282.
and can remain switched on. ▷ ECO PRO driving mode, refer to page 283.
▷ Adapting to the course of the road, refer to
Energy recovery: CHARGE page 144.
The high-voltage battery of the hybrid system is
charged through energy recovery while driving. Safety of the hybrid system
The electric motor acts as a generator and con‐ Follow the information on safety, refer to
verts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electri‐ page 74.
cal energy, refer to page 126.
Long-term vehicle storage
Charging the vehicle Observe the information on vehicle storage and
The high-voltage battery of the vehicle can be on longer idle periods, refer to page 362.
charged, refer to page 286, via the charging
socket at charging stations or household sock‐
ets.
Regular and complete charging of the high-volt‐
age battery reduces the fuel consumption by us‐
ing electric energy.
Climate control while parking

and charging
The hybrid system makes it possible to operate
the automatic climate control prior to driving off
and with the combustion engine switched off.
During vehicle charging or if the high-voltage
battery is sufficiently charged, the car's interior
73
AT A GLANCE Safety of the hybrid system
Safety of the hybrid system

Vehicle features and Contact with water
options The hybrid system is typically safe even in the
following example situations:
cific and optional features offered with the series. ▷ Water in the footwell, for instance after a rain‐
It also describes features that are not necessarily storm when sunroof was kept open.
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the ▷ Vehicle is in water but only up to the allowed
selected options or country versions. This also height.
applies to safety-related functions and systems. ▷ Fluid escapes in the cargo area.
served. Automatic deactivation
If an accident occurs, the hybrid system is
Working on the hybrid switched off automatically to prevent risk of dan‐
system ger to occupants and other road users.
Read the information on What to do after an ac‐
General information cident, refer to page 354.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that no changes be made to the vehicle, forin‐
stance the retrofitting of accessories, that will
have an effect on the vehicle’s hybrid system.
Safety information
DANGER
Improperly performed work, in particular main‐
tenance and repair on the high-voltage system,
can lead to electric shock. There is a risk of in‐
jury, fire and danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that the work on the vehicle, in particular main‐
tenance and repair, be performed by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
74
Safety of the hybrid system AT A GLANCE
75
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
cific and optional features offered with the series. doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
It also describes features that are not necessarily this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
selected options or country versions. This also vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
applies to safety-related functions and systems. opened from the outside.
served.
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the
Vehicle key inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
General information
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
Depending on the equipment version, the vehicle the vehicle from the outside when there are
is delivered with two vehicle keys or one vehicle people in it.
key and the BMW display key, refer to page 80.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 79. Warning
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐ Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
sion, various settings, refer to page 92, can be can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
configured for the button functions. themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
A personal driver profile, refer to page 59, for following actions:
each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
To provide information on maintenance require‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
ments, the service data is stored in the vehicle
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
key, refer to page 341.
dows.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key,
take the vehicle key with you when exiting the
vehicle. ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
76
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Overview ▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, refer

to page 59, are applied.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the car's interior, they will not be
folded out when unlocking.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
tion is switched off.
1 Unlocking ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
2 Locking switched off.
3 Opening the trunk lid After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle
4 Press and hold or press three times in quick is ready for operation.
succession: panic mode The light functions may depend on the ambient
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature brightness.
Convenient opening
Unlocking
General information cle key after unlocking.
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking us‐ The windows and the glass sunroof with sun
ing the vehicle key depends on the following set‐ protection are opened, as long as the button on
tings: the vehicle key is pressed.
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked. Locking
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal. General information
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 162, is The behavior of the vehicle during locking using
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐ the vehicle key depends on the following set‐
locked. tings:
▷ If the driver's seat is set to the last position ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
saved in the driver's profile. a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
Unlocking the vehicle in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior
Press the button on the vehicle key. mirrors are not folded in when the hazard
warning flashers are switched on.
If, due to the settings, only the driver's door was ▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature is acti‐
unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key vated during locking.
again to unlock the other vehicle access points.
Locking the vehicle
In addition, the following functions are executed:
1. Close the driver's door.
77
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless

2. Press the button on the vehicle key. they were manually switched off. For switch‐
The following functions are executed: ing the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
▷ All doors and the trunk lid are locked. page 166.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐ ▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior light‐
tion is switched on. This prevents the doors ing, refer to page 162, will be switched on.
from being unlocked using the lock buttons The light functions may depend on the ambient
or the door openers. brightness.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
switched on. Trunk lid
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks General information
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button. do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
With Comfort Access: try version, it is also possible to have the doors
convenient closing unlocked. To perform settings, refer to
page 92.
Safety information
Safety information
Warning
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure Body parts can be jammed when operating the
that the area of movement of the doors is clear trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
during convenient closing. the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
Closing
Press and hold the button on the vehicle NOTICE
key in the area close to the vehicle after During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
locking. up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun
is clear during opening and closing.
protection are closed, as long as the button on
the vehicle key is pressed.
Opening
Switching on the interior and
exterior lights cle key for approx. 1 second.
Press the button on the vehicle key with
the vehicle locked.
Panic mode
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐ You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
onds after locking. self in a dangerous situation.
78
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key 4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
and hold for at least 3 seconds. tive side facing up.
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key 5. Press the cover closed.
three times in succession. 6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key
until the integrated key engages.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
Headlight courtesy delay feature er’s service center or another qualified
on service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
cle key for approx. 1 second.
Additional vehicle keys
It is possible to adjust the duration of the head‐ Additional vehicle keys are available from a serv‐
light courtesy delay feature, refer to page 162. ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle Loss of vehicle keys
key, refer to page 85. A lost vehicle key can be blocked and replaced
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐ by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the service center or repair shop.
cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2. Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message, refer to page 145, is
displayed.
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐
function under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
For replacing the battery, refer to page 79.
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐ ▷ Interference of the radio connection from
ing a pointed object and lift it out. transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐
jects.
Do not transport the vehicle key together with
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the vehicle key.
electronic devices.
79
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐ ▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐
ing process of mobile devices, for instance ices of the BMW Connected app include the
charging of a mobile phone. ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.
▷ The vehicle key is in direct proximity of the This requires an active BMW Connected‐
wireless charging tray. Drive contract and the BMW Connected app
Place the vehicle key in a different location. must be installed on a smartphone.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be ▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
unlocked and locked from the outside with the the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
integrated key, refer to page 85. An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
Switching the drive-ready state on
via emergency detection of the
vehicle key BMW display key
General information
The BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐
tional mechanical key. If the display key is used,
the mechanical key should be carried with you,
for instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is
used like the integrated key, refer to page 85.
The display key supports all functions of the
standard remote control.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready In addition, the following functions are also avail‐
state if the vehicle key has not been detected. able:
Proceed as follows in this case: ▷ Display status of doors and windows.
1. Hold the back of the vehicle key against the ▷ Display status of the alarm system.
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐ ▷ Operate stationary climate control.
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
▷ Adjust charging times.
ter.
▷ Call up range with available fuel and the cur‐
2. If the vehicle key is detected:
rent battery charge state.
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
▷ Display charge state of the high-voltage bat‐
onds.
tery.
If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
▷ Display service information.
change the position of the vehicle key and repeat
the procedure.
Safety information
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to Warning
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in ve‐ People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
hicle key? doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
80
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be Overview

opened from the outside.
Warning
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are 1 Opening the trunk lid
people in it.
2 Unlocking
3 Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode
Warning
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger 4 Locking
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the 5 Display
following actions: 6 Back
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. 7 Switch the display on/off
▷ Releasing the parking brake. 8 Micro-USB charging socket
dows.
Reception range
The number of available display key functions
▷ Using vehicle equipment. depends on the distance from the vehicle.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not ▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ble.
▷ In the wider reception range, you can access
status information and use the stationary cli‐
mate control.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle,
you can display the last transmitted status in‐
formation from the vehicle.
The symbol is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception
range.
81
Display Switching on/off

The display will go out automatically after a brief
General information period to conserve battery power.
The display is divided into the upper status line, To hide the display manually:
the information area, and the lower status line. Press the button on the left side of the display
key. For an overview, refer to page 81.
Upper status line
To show the display:
The upper status line displays the following infor‐
mation: 1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐
play key.
▷ / Vehicle secured/vehicle unsecured.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
top to unlock the screen lock.
▷ Charge state of the display key battery.
To switch off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
Information area
The information area can be used to access in‐ 1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
formation and perform additional functions. 2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
If the information area contains more than one the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
page, then page indicators are shown beneath 3. "OK"
the information. To switch the display on:
A solid indicator denotes the current Press the button on the left side of the display
page. key.
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change
between the pages. Operating concept
If further information is available on a page, tap The following information shows how to access
the appropriate symbol. the information and functions using the main
To return to the original page: tap on the menus.
symbol beneath the display.
Main menu Information/Function
Touch it again to display the charge state of the
high-voltage battery. "Security /
information" Door status.
Lower status line Alarm system status.
The lower status line indicates whether or not After alarm triggering: date,
the display key is within reception range, refer to time, and reason for triggering
page 81. the alarm.
▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐
tion range.
Window status.
▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐
ception range. It indicates when the last data Glass sunroof status.
transfer from the vehicle took place.
82
Main menu Information/Function At higher temperatures, the charge current

through the display key may be reduced, and
"Vehicle Maintenance indicators of in isolated cases the charge process may be
information" Condition Based Service CBS, interrupted temporarily.
refer to page 341.
▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐
Status of the roadside parking less charging tray, make sure there are no
lights. objects between it and the wireless charging
tray.
"Mobility info" Range with available fuel.
Status during charging.
Safety information
"Departure Operate stationary climate
setting" control. Warning
High-voltage battery: schedule When charging a device that meets the Qi
charging times. standard in the wireless charging tray, any
metal objects located between the device and
Display key battery the tray can become very hot. Placing storage
devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards,
General information cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal
transmission, between the device and the tray
Follow the following information:
may impair the card function. There is a risk of
▷ If the charge state of the display key battery injury and risk of damage to property. When
declines, the display is switched off automati‐ charging mobile devices, make sure there are
cally. The battery must be recharged so that no objects between the device and the tray.
the display can be switched back on. The op‐
erability of the standard buttons is retained
until the battery is completely discharged. Charging
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first time Via USB
or if the key has not been used for an ex‐ Connect the display key via the micro-USB
tended period. charging socket to a USB port.
▷ The display key can be used during charging
via the USB port. If the battery is fully dis‐ In the center console
charged, it may take some time before the
display key can be used again.
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
teed that every charger will function properly.
The charging duration depends on the
charger used.
▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the
charger and the display key.
Charging in the wireless charging tray may 1. Open the tray cover.
heat up the tray and the display key.
83
2. Place the display key into the middle of the Switching on drive-ready state via
wireless charging tray in front of the cup hold‐ emergency detection of the BMW
ers. display key
Ensure that the display is facing up.
3. Close the tray cover.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
▷ The battery of the display key is discharged.
state if the display key has not been detected.
Charge the battery, refer to page 83.
Proceed as follows in this case:
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with 1. Hold the display key with its back against the
high transmitting power. marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐ tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
jects. ter.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ 2. If the display key is detected:
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
rect proximity. onds.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐ If the display key is not detected, slightly change
ing process of mobile devices, for instance the position of the display key and repeat the
charging of a mobile phone. procedure.
Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices. Resetting the BMW display key
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also If the charged display key cannot be switched on
be unlocked and locked from the outside with anymore or if the display does not respond to
the mechanical key. entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
Press and hold the following buttons on the dis‐
play key at the same time for at least 10 seconds
until the display is switched off and then on
again:
▷
84
Integrated key Locking/unlocking via the door

lock
General information 1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with
one hand.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without the vehicle key using the integrated key.
The integrated key also fits the glove compart‐
ment.
Safety information
Warning
inside is only possible with special knowledge. 2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ back under the cover and push the cover out.
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ Use the thumb for counter support to prevent
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the cover from falling out of the door handle.
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with the
door. The door handle can be moved. When
pulling the door handle with the integrated key
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ 3. Remove the cover.
erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
the outside door handle.
integrated key.
Removing
The other doors must be unlocked or locked

from the inside.
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
85
Alarm system Pull the door opener above the armrest.

The activated alarm system is triggered when ▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door
the door is opened, if the vehicle has been un‐ to open the door. The other doors remain
locked via the door lock. locked.
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐ ▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on
cle is locked with the integrated key. the door to be opened; the first time unlocks
the door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
Buttons for the central
locking system Comfort Access
General information Concept
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is The vehicle can be accessed without operating
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐ the vehicle key.
tem and interior lights come on.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket, is sufficient.
Overview
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key
when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐
rior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the
door handle.
Buttons for the central locking system. ▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Opening trunk lid.
Locking ▷ Opening and closing the trunk lid with no-
touch activation.
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when ▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
locking. outside of the vehicle near the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
Unlocking possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Press the button.
Opening
▷ Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
86
Unlocking Locking
General information General information

The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the
the Comfort Access depends on the following Comfort Access depends on the following set‐
settings: tings:
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
with a light signal or a sound signal. a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
vehicle is being unlocked. in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior
mirrors are not folded in when the hazard
Unlocking the vehicle warning flashers are switched on.
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature is acti‐
vated during locking.
Locking the vehicle

Close the driver's door.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
In addition, the following functions are executed:

▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle
key, this driver profile will be activated and the
settings that are stored in it will be applied.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
they were manually switched off. 1 second without grasping the door handle.
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
The following functions are executed:
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the car's interior, they will not be ▷ All doors and the trunk lid are locked.
folded out when unlocking. ▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐ tion is switched on. This prevents the doors
tion is switched off. from being unlocked using the lock buttons
or the door openers.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
switched off. ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
switched on.
87
Convenient closing Safety information
Safety information Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the
Warning trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
With convenient closing, body parts can be the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure during opening and closing.
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
Closing
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
Opening

closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass

sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
Press the button on the exterior of the trunk lid.
Opening the trunk lid
Opening and closing the trunk lid
General information with no-touch activation
If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access,
locked doors will not be unlocked. Concept
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, The trunk lid can be opened with no-touch acti‐
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. vation using the vehicle key you are carrying.
With automatic tailgate operation, it can also be
closed with no-touch activation. Two sensors
detect a forward-directed foot motion in the cen‐
tral rear area and the trunk lid is opened or
closed.
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
88
If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the trunk this movement, the leg must pass through
lid may open or close inadvertently if you unin‐ the ranges of both sensors.
tentionally move your foot or if a foot movement
is detected.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If you open the trunk lid with no-touch activation,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
Safety information
Opening
Warning
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐ Before the trunk lid opens, the hazard warning
tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your system flashes.
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do With automatic tailgate: Moving your foot again
not touch the vehicle. will stop the opening motion, and moving it one
more time after that will close the trunk lid.
Warning Closing
Body parts can be jammed when operating the The trunk lid can only be closed with no-touch
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that activation if automatic tailgate operation is active.
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear Perform the foot movement described earlier.
during opening and closing. The hazard warning system flashes and an
acoustic signal sounds.
Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐
NOTICE tion, and moving it one more time after that will
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and re-open the trunk lid.
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid Malfunction
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐
function under the following circumstances:
Performing the foot movement ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
For replacing the battery, refer to page 79.
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of ▷ Interference of the radio connection from
the vehicle. transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐
jects.
metal objects.
89
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ Without automatic tailgate

bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ operation
rect proximity to the vehicle key.
Do not transport the vehicle key together with Opening from the outside
electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request recognition function on the door han‐
dles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or
use the integrated key, refer to page 85.
Trunk lid ▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button
on the outside of the trunk lid.
General information ▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, with you and press the button on the outside
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. of the trunk lid.
The trunk lid cannot be opened if it is locked us‐
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐
ing the switch in the glove compartment. Sepa‐
rately lock the trunk lid, refer to page 92.
When unlocking with the vehicle key, refer to
page 78, the doors may also be unlocked.
Safety information
Open from inside
Warning
Press the button in the storage com‐
Body parts can be jammed when operating the partment of the driver's door.
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing. Closing
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
Grasp the recess grips and pull the trunk lid

down.
With Comfort Access: With the driver’s

door closed, press the button on the in‐
90
side of the trunk lid to lock an unlocked vehicle ▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
before closing the trunk lid. Pressing again continues the opening mo‐
tion.
With automatic tailgate ▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv‐

er's door. Pressing again continues the open‐
operation: opening and closing ing motion.
Opening
Closing
From the outside
From the outside
▷ Press the button on the inside of the

trunk lid.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press the button on the inside of the

trunk lid.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
trunk lid. The driver's door must be closed for
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button this purpose and the vehicle key must be out‐
on the outside of the trunk lid. side of the vehicle in the area of the trunk lid.
▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
with you and press the button on the outside From the inside
of the trunk lid.
Pull and hold the button in the storage
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐ compartmenr of the driver's door.
The vehicle key must be located inside the vehi‐
When unlocking with the vehicle key, refer to cle for this function.
page 78, the doors may also be unlocked.
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk lid is
closed.
From the inside
Press the button in the storage com‐ Interruption of the closing procedure
partment of the driver's door. The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Interruption of the opening procedure ▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.
The opening operation is interrupted: ▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
▷ When the vehicle starts moving. trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk
lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid. ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
lid.
trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid.
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the clos‐
ing motion.
91
Malfunction Automatic Soft Closing

In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate
the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow and
smooth motion.
Safety information
Locking separately Warning

Body parts can be jammed while operating the
General information doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
The switch in the glove compartment decouples the area of movement of the doors is clear dur‐
the trunk lid from the central locking system, so it ing opening and closing.
can no longer be opened.
If the glove compartment is locked with the
Closing
integrated key, the vehicle key can be handed
over without the integrated key, for instance to a To close the doors, push lightly.
valet parking service. It is then no longer possible Closing occurs automatically.
for objects to be removed from the cargo area
even with the vehicle key.
Adjusting
Securing
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. General information
▷ Trunk lid not secured, arrow 2. Depending on the package and country version,
various settings are available for the vehicle key
functions.
These settings are stored for the driver profile
Slide the switch into the desired position. currently used.
Trunk emergency unlocking Unlocking and locking
Doors
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select the symbol.
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
▷ "Driver's door only"
The trunk lid unlocks. Only the driver's door is unlocked. Press‐
ing again unlocks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
92
Confirmation signals from the Automatic locking

vehicle Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key"
3. "Doors/Key" 4. Select the desired setting:
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐ ▷ "Lock automatically"
tion signals:
The vehicle locks automatically after a
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock" while if no door is opened after unlocking.
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐ ▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
ing by one.
The vehicle locks automatically after you
▷ With alarm system: drive off.
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two honks of the Adjusting the last seat, mirror, and
horn, locking by one. steering wheel position
Via iDrive:
Folding mirrors automatically
1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" 3. Select driver profile.
2. "Vehicle settings" The setting can be made for the driver
3. "Doors/Key" profile marked with this symbol.
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked" 4. "Last seat position automatic"
The exterior mirrors are automatically folded When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
in during locking. and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
tions. When the drive-ready state is switched on,
Automatic unlocking the steering wheel is moved to its last set posi‐
Via iDrive: tion.
The most recent position is independent of the
1. "My Vehicle" positions saved via the seat memory.
3. "Doors/Key" Trunk lid
4. "Unlock at end of trip" Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
After drive-ready state is switched off by try version, this setting may not be offered.
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked ve‐ Via iDrive:
hicle is automatically unlocked.
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Doors/Key"
93
▷ "Tailgate" By flashing of the hazard warning system and

The trunk lid is opened. headlights, where required.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)" Do not modify the system to ensure function of

the alarm system.
The trunk lid is opened and the doors are
unlocked.
Switching on/off
Establishing idle state after When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either
with the vehicle key or via Comfort Access, the
opening the front doors
alarm system is switched off and on at the same
Via iDrive: time.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings" Opening the doors with the alarm
3. "Doors/Key"
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
4. "Turn off after door opening"
opened if the door was unlocked using the
Opening the front doors establishes the idle integrated key in the door lock.
state, refer to page 35.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 95.
Alarm system Opening the trunk lid with the

alarm system switched on
General information The trunk lid can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes: After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again provided the doors are locked. The
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
hazard warning system flashes once.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐ Panic mode
ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐ You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
ing the vehicle. self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard and hold for at least 3 seconds.
Diagnosis.
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐ three times in succession.
nected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-
Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD Onboard To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Diagnosis, refer to page 342.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Visual alarm:
94
Indicator light on the interior Avoiding unintentional alarms

mirror
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds: ▷ With animals in the vehicle.
The alarm system is switched on. ▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐
ing.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off in such situations.
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured. and interior motion sensor
When the still open access points are closed, Press the button on the vehicle key within
the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐ 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
sor will be switched on. locked.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking: The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
til drive-ready state is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered. Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
Tilt alarm sensor ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key
and activate the drive-ready state via emer‐
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
gency detection of the vehicle key, refer to
The alarm system responds in situations such as page 79.
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
▷ With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve‐
towed.
hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front pas‐
senger door handle completely.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
95
Power windows Opening

▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
General information
The window opens while the switch is being
The windows can be opened with the vehicle
held.
key from the outside as well as closed with Com‐
fort Access. ▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance
point.
With Comfort Access: The windows can be
closed from the outside via Comfort Access. The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Safety information
Closing
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.
Warning
The window closes while the switch is
When operating the windows, body parts and
being held.
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
the area of movement of the windows is clear point.
during opening and closing. The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
Overview Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door frame
and window while a window is being closed.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing action is in‐
Power windows terrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety switch
Safety information
Functional requirements Warning

The windows can be operated under the follow‐
Accessories on the windows such as antennas
ing conditions.
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐
▷ Standby state is established. jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
▷ Drive-ready state is activated. movement of the windows.
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
96
Closing without the jam protection Rear window roller

system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
sunblind
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
Safety information
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there. NOTICE
The window closes with limited jam protec‐ When operating the roller sunblind, objects
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific stored on the shelf may damage the roller sun‐
threshold, closing is interrupted. blind. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point roller sunblind is clear during the operation.
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without jam protection. Overview
Safety switch
Concept
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐
dren, for instance from opening and closing the
rear windows using the switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Button for the roller sunblind.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Operation
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on. Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open roller
sunblind.
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.
System limits
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blind after having activated it consecutively a
number of times, the overheating protection
mechanism is active. The system is blocked for a
limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐
tem cool.
97
The roller sunblind cannot be moved at low inte‐ Overview

rior temperatures.
Roller sunblinds, rear side

windows
Warning
With closed roller sunblinds and open windows,
the roller sunblinds may be strained while driv‐ Opening/closing the glass sun‐
ing due to the wind. The roller sunblinds may roof.
be damaged and vehicle occupants may be
harmed. There is a risk of injury. Do not open
the windows while driving if the roller sunblinds
are closed.
Pull out the roller sunblind at the strap and hook
it onto the bracket. The glass sunroof and the sun protection can be
operated under the following conditions.
▷ Standby state is established.
Glass sunroof ▷ Drive-ready state is activated.
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
General information
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐ Lifting/closing glass sunroof
erated using the same switch.
Push switch briefly upward.
The glass sunroof can be opened from the out‐
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts
side with the vehicle key and also closed with
and the sun protection opens
Comfort Access.
slightly.
With Comfort Access: The glass sunroof can be
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closed from the outside via Comfort Access.
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sun protection
Safety information does not move.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the glass
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
98
Opening/closing the glass tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to
sunroof and sun protection this comfort position.
separately Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
roof fully.
▷ Press the switch in the desired
direction to the resistance
Jam protection system
point and hold it there.
Holding down the switch Concept
opens the sun protection. If
The jam protection prevents objects or body
the sun protection is already
parts from becoming jammed between the roof
fully open, the glass sunroof
and glass sunroof while the glass sunroof is clos‐
opens.
ing.
The glass sunroof closes
while the switch is being held. General information
If the glass sunroof is already
closed or in the tilted position, If a resistance or blockage is detected while the
the sun protection closes. glass sunroof is closing, the closing operation is
interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past position, or it is stopped when closing from the
the resistance point. tilted position.
The sun protection opens automatically. If the
sun protection is already fully open, the glass Closing from the open position
sunroof opens automatically. without jam protection
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
position, the sun protection closes automati‐
cally.
Pressing the switch upward stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass

sunroof and sun protection 1. Close all doors.
together 2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
Briefly press the switch twice in
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
succession in the desired direc‐
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
tion past the resistance point.
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
The glass sunroof and sun pro‐
3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐
tection move together. Pressing
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof
the switch upward stops the motion.
closes without jam protection. Make sure that
the closing area is clear.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐
99
Closing from the raised position ▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
without jam protection then opens and closes again.
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows: and sun protection have opened then closed
again.
1. Close all doors.

2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
Initializing after a power

interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐
ated to a limited extent. Initializing the system
can help in this case.
The system can be initialized under the following
conditions:
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing the system

Press the switch up and hold it
until initialization is complete.
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.

▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
100
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Vehicle features and
Warning
options With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐
sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety
belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting
the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
most upright position as possible and do not
adjust again while driving.
served.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
Sitting safely seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
the occupants can make a vital contribution to ment.
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Follow the infor‐ Electrically adjustable seats
mation in the following chapters:
General information
▷ Seats, refer to page 101.
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 104.
stored for the driver profile currently used. When
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 105. the vehicle is unlocked via the vehicle key, the
▷ Airbags, refer to page 168. position is automatically retrieved if the function,
refer to page 93, is activated for this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored using
Seats the memory function, refer to page 111.
Safety information
Warning
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
101
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Overview Seat tilt
1 Thigh support Move switch up or down.

2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
3 Upper backrest Backrest tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Backrest tilt, head restraint
Forward/backward
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch forward or backward.
Push switch up or down.
102
Sport seat To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,

the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Adjusting
▷ Press the front section of the
button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push
The backrest width increases.
the thigh support forward or back.
Upper backrest
Lumbar support
Concept
Concept
The upper backrest supports the back in the
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
shoulder area. A correct setting leads to a re‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
laxed seating position and reduces strain on the
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are
shoulder muscles.
supported for upright posture.
Adjusting
Adjusting
▷ Press the front/rear section of
the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section
of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
▷ Press the front section of the button:
Backrest width The upper backrest is inclined forward.

▷ Press the rear section of the button:
Concept The upper backrest is inclined backward.
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral
support when taking corners.
General information
You can change the backrest width by adjusting
the side wings of the backrest.
103
Safety belts stance in the event of an accident or during

braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all
Number of safety belts and occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
safety belt buckles
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only of‐ Warning
fer protection when adjusted correctly. With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear tective function of the middle safety belt is not
seats are intended for the persons sitting on the guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger
left and right. to life. If you are using the middle safety belt,
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seats is lock the wider rear seat backrest.
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
General information Warning

Always make sure that safety belts are being The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
worn by the occupants before driving off. The belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐ following situations:
tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐ ▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
tute for safety belts. damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will way.
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build ▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
if the seat is correctly adjusted. modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
Safety information the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,
Warning safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
the safety belts checked after an accident at
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
safety belt to serve its protective function.
service center or repair shop.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐ Correct use of safety belts
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
ported and secured in designated child ▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
restraint systems. your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
Warning
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
fragile objects.
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐ ▷ Avoid thick clothing.
104
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward Safety belt reminder for rear
around your upper body. seats
Buckling the safety belt General information
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐
and hip to put it on. vated each time the engine starts.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt The safety belt reminder is also activated when a
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐
audibly. ing the trip.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐
minates after the engine is started.
Symbol Description
Green: the safety belt is buckled on

the corresponding rear seat.
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and Red: the safety belt is not buckled on
passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐ the corresponding rear seat.
ened once after driving away.
Unbuckling the safety belt Safety mode

1. Hold the safety belt firmly. In critical situations, for instance during an emer‐
gency stop, the front safety belts tighten auto‐
2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle. matically.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up If the situation passes without an accident occur‐
mechanism. ring, the belt tension relaxes.
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
Safety belt reminder for driver's stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐
seat and front passenger seat ing the red button in the safety belt buckle. Fas‐
ten the safety belt before continuing on your trip.
The indicator light lights up and a signal
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts Front head restraints
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
reminder can also be activated if objects are General information
placed on the front passenger seat.
The current head restraint position can be stored
using the memory function, refer to page 111.
105
Safety information Have the active head restraint checked and if

necessary replaced in the case of damage or if it
was exposed to an accident.
Warning
A missing protective effect due to removed or Adjusting the height: power head
not correctly adjusted head restraints can restraints
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the Push switch up or down.
backrest tilt as needed.
Adjusting the distance: manual

Warning head restraints
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury. ▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. straint toward the rear.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes ▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
hangers, directly on the head restraint. front.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ After setting the distance, make sure that the
termined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint engages correctly.
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance Adjusting the distance: power
pillows, while driving. head restraints
The head restraint is automatically repositioned
Active head restraint when the upper backrest is adjusted.
In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
106
Adjusting the side extensions

Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint tective effect in the head and neck area. There
forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐ is a risk of injury.
ing position. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
Removing hangers, directly on the head restraint.
The head restraints cannot be removed. ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
Rear head restraints ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Safety information
Folding down the middle head
Warning restraint
A missing protective effect due to removed or To improve the view to the rear, the center head
not correctly adjusted head restraints can restraint can be folded to the rear. Only push the
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There head restraint down if no one will be sitting in the
is a risk of injury. center seat.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and
fold the head restraint backward.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
107
Adjusting the height After the installation, make sure that the head re‐
straint engages correctly.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
The height of the outer head restraints can be curved than the driver's side mirror.
adjusted. The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via
the head restraint down. the vehicle key, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if the function, refer to page 93, is acti‐
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
vated for this purpose.
After setting the height, make sure that the head
The current exterior mirror position can be stored
restraint engages correctly.
using the memory function, refer to page 111.
Removing Safety information

With through-loading system:
The outer head restraints can be removed. Only Warning
remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
in the seat in question. they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
by looking over your shoulder.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to

page 272, in question.
2. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐
ance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
108
Overview Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐

lowing situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as
needed and when the drive-ready state is
1 Adjusting switched on.
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior
Adjusting electrically
mirror, refer to page 109, are used to control
Press the button. this.
The selected mirror moves along with the
button movement. Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Selecting a mirror
Concept
To change over to the other mirror:
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
Slide the switch. the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other format‐
Malfunction ting issue - low-lying obstacles when parking,
for instance.
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
Activating
Folding in and out
1. slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
NOTICE 2. Engage selector lever position R.
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a Deactivating
risk of damage to property. Before washing, Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button. position.
Press the button. Interior mirror

Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx. General information
15 mph/20 km/h.
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
109
▷ In the mirror glass. The current steering wheel position can be

▷ On the back of the mirror. stored using the memory function, refer to
page 111.
Overview
Adjusting
Functional requirements Move the steering wheel to the preferred height

▷ Keep the photocells clean. and angle to suit your seating position by press‐
ing the switch.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Assistance getting in and out
The steering wheel temporarily moves into the
Steering wheel highest position to make it easier to enter and
exit the vehicle.
Safety information
Heated steering wheel
Warning
Overview
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the
vehicle is stationary only.
Electric steering wheel

adjustment
General information Heated steering wheel

The steering wheel setting is stored for the driver
profile currently in use. When the drive-ready
state is switched on, the position is automatically Switching on/off
retrieved if the function, refer to page 93, is acti‐ Press the button.
vated for this purpose.
110
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes Overview

after an intermediate stop, the heated steering
wheel activates automatically if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function: The memory buttons are located on the front
▷ Seat position. doors.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position. Storing
▷ Height of the Head-up Display. 1. Set the desired position.
General information 2. Press the button. The writing on the

Two memory locations with different settings button lights up.
can be set for each driver profile, refer to 3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is
page 59. lit. A signal sounds.
The following settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width. Calling up settings
▷ Lumbar support. The stored position is called up automatically.
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
Safety information The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐
tons is pressed again.
Warning
Once underway, adjustment of the seat position
Using the memory function while driving can
on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is stationary.
Massage function
Concept
Warning Depending on the program, the massage func‐
tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
circulation and can avoid fatigue.
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ General information
ment. Eight different massage programs can be se‐
lected:
111
▷ Pelvis activation. 5. "Seat massage"

▷ Upper body activation. 6. Select the desired setting.
▷ Full body activation.
▷ Back massage.
Seat heating
▷ Shoulder massage.
▷ Lumbar massage. Overview
▷ Upper body training.
▷ Full body training. Front
Overview
Seat heating
Massage function
Rear
Switching on
Press the button once for each intensity
level.
The maximum intensity level is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Switching off
Press and hold the button until the Seat heating
LEDs go out.
Switching on
Adjusting the massage program
Press the button once for each temper‐
Via iDrive:
ature level.
1. "My Vehicle" The maximum temperature is reached when
2. "Vehicle settings" three LEDs are lit.
3. "Seat comfort" If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
4. Select desired seat. after a stop, seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
112
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 283, Overview

the heating output is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button until the bar
display on the climate control display
goes out.
Seat heating distribution

The heating action in the seat cushion and the Active seat ventilation
seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways.
Via iDrive: Switching on
1. "My Vehicle" Press the button once for each ventila‐
2. "Vehicle settings" tion level.
3. "Climate functions" The highest level is active when three LEDs are
lit.
4. Select a menu item:
▷ "Seat heating" The ventilation switches back by one level after a
short time.
▷ "Seat and steering wheel heating"
▷ "Seat climate control"
Switching off
▷ "Seat climate / steer. wheel heating"
Press and hold the button until the bar
5. Select the desired seat, if needed.
display on the climate control display
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat goes out.
heating distribution.
Active seat ventilation Individual activation
Concept Concept
A number of heating and cooling functions can
Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas
be automatically activated depending on the ex‐
provide a comfortable seat temperature.
ternal temperature.
General information
The external temperature at which the functions
are to be automatically activated can be set via
iDrive.
Activation is performed if the external tempera‐
ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature
in the first 2 minutes after drive-ready state has
113
been switched on. A new alignment is carried out

after the settings have been changed.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing functions can be automatically activated:
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Heated steering wheel.
▷ Seat ventilation.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, the functions are activated automati‐
cally with the levels that were last selected.
The safety belt of the corresponding seat is
buckled.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Climate functions"
4. Select a menu item:
▷ "Steering wheel heating"
▷ "Seat heating"
▷ "Seat and steering wheel heating"
▷ "Seat climate control"
▷ "Seat climate / steer. wheel heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. Select the menu item of the desired function.
7. Set the external temperature at which the
function is to be activated.
8. Set the desired level.
114
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Transporting children safely

Warning
options A heated vehicle may result in death to per‐
sons, especially children and animals. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not leave
persons, especially children and animals unat‐
tended in the vehicle.
When using these functions and systems, the Warning
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
served. restraint systems and their components to be‐
come very hot. Persons may sustain burn inju‐
ries when touching the hot components. There
The right place for children is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child re‐
straint system to direct sunlight or cover where
necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint
Safety information
system cool down before transporting a child.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Warning
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger Always transport children in the
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the rear seat
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. General information
▷ Releasing the parking brake. Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
dows. Transport children younger than 13 years of age
or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat
in suitable child restraint systems designed for
▷ Using vehicle equipment. the age, weight and size of the child. Children
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ as soon as a suitable child restraint system can
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ no longer be used due to their age, weight, or
ing and lock the vehicle. size.
115
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Safety information Installing child restraint

systems
Warning
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
General information
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐ Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can ating and safety information of the child restraint
be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐ system manufacturer when selecting, installing,
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety and using child restraint systems.
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking and Safety information
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
Warning
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
The protective effect of child restraint systems
and their fastening systems which have been
Children on the front passenger damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐
ited or lost. A child cannot be properly re‐
seat
strained in the event of an accident or braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of inju‐
General information
ries or danger to life.
Before using a child restraint system on the front
Do not use child restraint systems which have
passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and
been damaged or exposed to an accident.
side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐
activated. For automatic deactivation of front- If a child restraint system and its fastening sys‐
seat passenger airbags, refer to page 170. tem has been damaged or exposed to an acci‐
dent, have these systems checked and re‐
Safety information placed by the dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a Warning
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
116
On the front passenger seat Child seat security
Deactivating airbags
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐
ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
Before installing a child restraint system in the ten child restraint systems.
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
Locking the safety belt
side are deactivated.
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
tomatically, refer to page 170. 2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
Seat position and height 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system. The
Before installing a child restraint system, move
safety belt is locked.
the front passenger seat as far back as it will go
and, if possible, bring it up to medium height.
This seat position and height ensure the best Unlocking the safety belt
possible position for the belt and offers optimal 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
protection in the event of an accident. 2. Remove the child restraint system.
If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located in 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the pletely.
front passenger seat carefully forward until the
best possible belt guide position is reached.
LATCH child restraint fixing
Backrest width
system
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger seat,
open the backrest width completely. Do not General information
change the backrest width again and do not call LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
up a memory position. Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
ating and safety information from the child re‐
straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐
stalling, and using LATCH child restraint fixing
systems.
117
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Mounts for the lower LATCH Before installing LATCH child

anchors restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
General information child restraint system.
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child Assembly of LATCH child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restraint fixing systems
restrained by the internal harnesses.
1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
er's information.
Safety information
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly engaged.
Warning
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are
not correctly engaged, the protective effect of Child restraint systems
the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be with tether strap
limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐ Safety information
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest. Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
Position for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury.
Symbol Meaning Make sure that the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
The corresponding symbol it passes the upper anchor.
shows the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐ Warning
chors are marked with a pair, (2),
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
of LATCH symbols.
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
For vehicles equipped with a there is none. In certain situations, for instance
middle seat: braking maneuvers or in case of an accident,
It is not recommended to use the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a
the inner lower anchors of risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that
standard outer LATCH positions the rear backrests are locked.
to fasten a child restraint system
on the middle seat. Use the ve‐
hicle safety belt instead for the NOTICE
middle seat.
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of
child restraint systems are only provided for
these retaining straps. When other objects are
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
118
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
child restraint systems to the upper anchors. anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
6. Lower and engage head restraints as
Anchors
needed.
The respective symbol shows the
anchor for the upper retaining
strap. Seats with an upper top Locking the doors and
tether are marked with this sym‐
bol. It can be found on the rear
windows in the rear
seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
General information
Routing the retaining strap In certain situations it may be advisable to secure
the rear doors and windows, for instance when
transporting children.
Doors
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
5 Rear window shelf The door can now be opened from the outside
6 Seat backrest only.
7 Upper retaining strap

Safety switch for the rear
Attaching the upper retaining Press the button on the driver's door.
strap to the anchor
1. Open the anchor cover. This locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear. Safety switch, refer to
2. Raise the head restraint. page 97.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports or along both sides of the head re‐
straint to the anchor.
For the middle seat, guide it over or along
both sides of the head restraint to the anchor
where applicable.
119
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and bustion engine. In this case, the vehicle will not
accelerate as usual.
options The maximum drive power can be utilized as
soon as eBoost is available, refer to page 143.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Drive-ready state
applies to safety-related functions and systems. Concept
When using these functions and systems, the The following are the different drive-ready state
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ variants:
served. ▷ Electric drive-ready state, refer to page 121.
The vehicle is powered by the electric motor.
Start/Stop button ▷ Starting of combustion engine, refer to
page 121.
Concept The vehicle is powered by the combustion

engine.
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches drive-ready state on or
Safety information
off, refer to page 35.
Steptronic transmission: the
drive-ready state is switched on DANGER
when you depress the brake pedal while press‐ If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
ing the Start/Stop button. sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
the drive-ready state back off and standby state, tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
refer to page 35, is switched back on. closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
Drive-ready state cannot be switched on, as long
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
as the charging cable is connected, refer to
ficient ventilation.
page 288.
Driving away Warning

1. Switch on drive-ready state. When driving in electric mode, pedestrians and
2. Apply drive mode. other traffic might pay less attention to the ve‐
hicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a
3. Release the parking brake.
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
4. Drive away. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
The full drive power may not be available for ap‐ tervene where appropriate.
proximately 30 seconds after starting the com‐
120
Driving CONTROLS
Depending on the prerequisite, the electric drive-

Warning ready state or a combustion engine start is pos‐
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and sible.
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ Electric drive-ready state
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured General information
against rolling away, follow the following: The vehicle is ready for driving without starting
▷ Set the parking brake. the combustion engine.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,

curb. Electric drive-ready state is possible, if the pre‐
requisites for electric driving, refer to page 123,
are fulfilled.
wheel chock.
Warning switched on, READY is displayed
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle in the instrument cluster.
following actions:
Combustion engine start
▷ Releasing the parking brake. Functional requirements
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ The combustion engine is started under the fol‐
dows. lowing conditions when the drive-ready state is
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. switched on, refer to page 121:
▷ Using vehicle equipment. ▷ The temperature of the hybrid system is too
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not high or too low.
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ ▷ The high-voltage battery has an insufficient
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ charge.
Switching off drive-ready state
After stopping the vehicle:
Switching on drive-ready state
1. Close the driver's door. 1. Engage selector lever position P.
2. Depress brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Press the Start/Stop button. 3. Set the parking brake.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐ After parking the vehicle, you may hear noises
strument cluster illuminate for a varied length due to operation of the hybrid system, such as
of time depending on the duration of the sys‐ for cooling of the high-voltage battery.
tem check.
121
CONTROLS Driving
Auto Start/Stop function ▷ When the hood is unlocked.

The indicator lights come on. The combustion
engine can only be started via the Start/Stop but‐
Concept ton.
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the combustion engine Switching off the vehicle during
when conditions for electric driving have been
an automatic engine stop
met. The standby state remains on.
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can
be switched off permanently, for instance when
General information
leaving it.
READY is displayed in the instrument cluster. If
necessary, the combustion engine starts auto‐ 1. Press the Start/Stop button.
matically. ▷ The standby state is activated.
The combustion engine is also stopped during ▷ The Auto Start/Stop function is deacti‐
the trip when rolling without acceleration or brak‐ vated.
ing. This driving condition, in which the vehicle is ▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
traveling without power and energy recovery is matically.
not active, is referred to as coasting, refer to
page 125. 2. Set the parking brake.
The combustion engine is not switched off auto‐

matically in the following situations:
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
▷ The combustion engine is not at operating
off the combustion engine automatically in the
temperature.
event of a malfunction. A message is displayed. It
▷ The transmission selector lever is in position is possible to continue driving. Have the system
M/S. checked.
▷ High-voltage battery is heavily discharged or
vehicle electrical system is heavily burdened.
▷ High stress of the automatic climate control Electric driving: ePOWER
in the heating or cooling phase.
▷ The hood is unlocked. General information
▷ The vehicle is being optimized for the current While driving electrically with ePOWER, the vehi‐
driving style, for instance during the break-in cle is powered by the electric motor. The system
period or after a service appointment. runs automatically.
▷ The hybrid system is malfunctioning. Depending on the charge state of the high-volt‐
age battery, maximum speed, the vehicle's ca‐
Safety mode pacity to accelerate, and range can vary.
An automatically stopped combustion engine For electrical driving, certain conditions, refer to
does not start independently: page 123, must be satisfied.
▷ With the driver's door open, if neither the Displays of the hybrid system, refer to page 142.
brake pedal nor the accelerator pedal is de‐
pressed, and the driver's safety belt is not
fastened.
122
Driving CONTROLS
Safety information Overview
Warning
When driving in electric mode, pedestrians and
other traffic might pay less attention to the ve‐
hicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
eDRIVE button
▷ State of charge and temperature of the high-
voltage battery is sufficient. Auto eDRIVE
▷ Selector lever position D or R engaged.
General information
▷ The accelerator pedal is not depressed too
far. Auto eDRIVE is activated by default when the ve‐
hicle is started via the Start/Stop button.
▷ The possible maximum speed for electric
driving is not exceeded. In Auto eDRIVE, the vehicle is driven in hybrid
mode corresponding to the various driving situa‐
▷ COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se‐
tions, i.e. the drive combines combustion engine
lected.
and electric motor. The respectively most effec‐
tive drive type is preferred.
eDRIVE button
The symbol is displayed while
General information driving electrically in
AUTO eDRIVE.
Using the eDRIVE button, the characteristics of
the hybrid system can be adjusted.
The different hybrid modes can be manually acti‐
vated in the following sequence: MAX eDRIVE
▷ Auto eDRIVE, refer to page 123
▷ MAX eDrive, refer to page 123 General information
▷ BATTERY CONTROL, refer to page 124 The vehicle is driven exclusively
Different system-related maximum speeds apply by electric power.
to the different settings. The electrical speed
range that can be achieved in each case is indi‐
cated by a blue marking in the speedometer.
If necessary, the maximum electrical speed that
applies to MAX eDRIVE may be deliberately ex‐
ceeded with the aid of kickdown, refer to
page 135. The combustion engine is automati‐
cally started and the system switches to AUTO
123
CONTROLS Driving
eDRIVE mode. Automatic starting of the engine If the current charge state is too low, the battery
while driving, refer to page 125. is charged during the trip. This charging process
increases the average consumption.
Activating MAX eDRIVE
Press the button repeatedly until MAX Activating BATTERY CONTROL
eDRIVE is displayed in the instrument
Press the button repeatedly until BAT‐
cluster.
TERY CONTROL is displayed in the in‐
When pressing the button, the current eDRIVE strument cluster.
setting is graphically displayed on the Control
Display. The BATTERY CONTROL sym‐
bol is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Specifying eMAX eDRIVE as the
default mode
MAX eDRIVE can be specified as the default
When pressing the button, the current eDRIVE
mode instead of AUTO eDRIVE.
setting is graphically displayed on the Control
Using the eDRIVE button: Display.
1. Activate with the MAX eDRIVE button.
Adjusting the charge state
2. "Configure MAX eDRIVE"
The charge state can be set in various ways.
3. "MAX eDRIVE by default"
Using the eDRIVE button:
Via iDrive:
1. Press the eDRIVE button repeatedly until
1. "My Vehicle"
BATTERY CONTROL is displayed in the in‐
2. "Vehicle settings" strument cluster and on the Control Display.
3. "Configure eDRIVE" 2. Select "Set target value" on the Control Dis‐
4. "Configure MAX eDRIVE" play.
5. "MAX eDRIVE by default" 3. "Target value:": set the desired value.
The function is available, if the prerequisites for Via iDrive:
electric driving are fulfilled, refer to page 123.
1. "My Vehicle"
BATTERY CONTROL
3. "BATTERY CONTROL"
General information 4. "Target value:"
A certain charge state of the high- 5. Set the desired value.
voltage battery can be maintained The charge state to be conserved is displayed as
with BATTERY CONTROL. This a percentage value on the Control Display.
charge state can be adjusted. The A marking is set in the instrument cluster for the
electric range can be conserved adjusted value in the charge state indicator of the
in this way for a later point in the trip, for in‐ high-voltage battery, refer to page 142.
stance.
124
Driving CONTROLS
Auto Start/Stop function, Driving with the

coasting
combustion engine:
Concept POWER
The combustion engine is automatically stopped
and disengaged from the drivetrain. This driving Concept
condition of rolling is referred to as coasting. The combustion engine provides the main drive
After coasting, the combustion engine or electric power to move the vehicle. If required, the high-
motor provides the necessary drive power auto‐ voltage battery is charged at the same time.
matically again, depending on the hybrid mode.
Coasting is possible under the following condi‐ Automatic starting while driving
tions: The combustion engine is automatically started
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently under the following conditions while driving:
charged. ▷ When accelerating heavily or on uphill grades.
▷ Transmission position D is engaged. ▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal beyond the
▷ The drive system is at operating temperature. resistance point at the full throttle position,
▷ In ECO PRO: mode, when coasting, without kickdown.
operating the brake, at speeds below ▷ The high-voltage battery has an insufficient
100 mph, approx. 160 km/h. charge.
▷ Selector lever position M/S is engaged.
Acoustic pedestrian protection ▷ Adapting to the course of the road when des‐
Depending on the country-specific version, the tination guidance is activated.
system generates a continuous driving noise at ▷ System-related demand from the hybrid
standstill with the drive-ready state activated and components.
during electric driving up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
Automatic switching off while
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the driving
surroundings.
Depending on the driving situation, the combus‐
As a result, other road users, for instance pedes‐ tion engine is switched off if the conditions for
trians or cyclists, can better perceive the vehicle. electric driving are met, refer to page 123.
Assistance from the

electric motor
Concept
The combustion engine provides the main drive
power to move the vehicle.
125
CONTROLS Driving
The electric motor provides assistance as

needed with additional propulsive power.
Parking brake
eASSIST Concept
During normal vehicle operation, the electric mo‐ The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
tor assists the combustion engine, depending on from rolling when it is parked.
the situation.
Safety information
eBOOST
Accelerating quickly, such as when passing, re‐ Warning
quires the maximum available power from the An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
electric motor. To do this, depress the accelera‐ possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
tor pedal firmly. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
Energy recovery: CHARGE In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured

against rolling away, follow the following:
Concept
The hybrid system makes it possible to convert turn the front wheels in the direction of the
kinetic energy into electrical energy during brak‐ curb.
ing and coasting. This recovered energy charges
the high-voltage battery. If necessary, this stored ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
electrical energy is output to the electric motor. also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
General information
Depending on the settings of the Driving Dynam‐ Warning
ics Control, refer to page 138, the high-voltage
battery is charged at different speeds and the ve‐
hicle decelerated differently while coasting.
following actions:
Conditions such as the following must be met to
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
recover kinetic energy:
▷ The vehicle is moving.
dows.
▷ Selector lever position D, M/S is set.
▷ The high-voltage battery is not fully charged.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
Displays in the instrument There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not

cluster
Energy recovery display in the instrument clus‐ ing and lock the vehicle.
ter, refer to page 143.
126
Driving CONTROLS
Overview
2. Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is pressed or selector
lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive away.
Parking brake The LED and indicator light go out.
Setting Automatic Hold
With a stationary vehicle Concept

Pull the switch. Steptronic transmission:
The LED lights up. This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ moving in stop-and-go traffic.
ter illuminates red. The parking brake is The vehicle is automatically held in place when it
set. is stationary.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle
While driving from rolling backward when driving off.
To use as emergency brake while driving:
General information
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled. Under the following conditions, the parking brake
is automatically engaged:
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and
the brake lights illuminate. ▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle
is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐ using the parking brake.
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Display
Releasing The indicator light changes from green
to red.
Releasing manually
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
127
CONTROLS Driving
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
Automatic Hold
curb.
Establishing function readiness of
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Automatic Hold
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
wheel chock.

Warning The LED lights up.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle The indicator light lights up green.
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger Automatic Hold is functional.
After every new vehicle start, the last se‐
following actions:
lected setting is active.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Function readiness is established and the driv‐
dows.
er's door is closed.
After stepping on the brake pedal, for instance
▷ Using vehicle equipment. when stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is au‐
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not tomatically secured against rolling.
The indicator light lights up green.
Driving off
NOTICE Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐ The brake is released automatically and the indi‐
gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐ cator light of the parking brake is no longer illumi‐
cle from rolling in a vehicle wash. There is a risk nated.
of damage to property. Deactivate Automatic
Hold prior to entering the vehicle wash.
128
Driving CONTROLS
Activating the parking brake This process may take a few seconds. Some
automatically mechanical sounds associated with this process
are normal.
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is The indicator light is no longer illumi‐
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is nated as soon as the parking brake is
exited. ready for operation again.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
Turn signal, high beams,
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the
drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐
headlight flasher
cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
vated. Turn signal
Switching function readiness off Turn signal in exterior mirror

Press the button. When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
The LED goes out.
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
The indicator light goes out. the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals

Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure
the vehicle against rolling before exiting.
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐
stance with a wheel chock, after existing the ve‐
hicle. Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
After a power failure The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
To reestablish parking brake functionality after a
Via iDrive:
power failure:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Pull the switch while stepping on the 3. "Lighting"
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set 4. "Exterior lighting"
and then push.
129
CONTROLS Driving
5. "One-touch turn signal" sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
6. Select the desired setting. wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
rently used.
Signaling briefly NOTICE
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
there for as long as you want the turn signal to wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
flash. tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
Switching on
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams Press the lever up until the desired position is
are switched on. reached.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. ▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
Wiper system ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper system
General information switched on: when travel continues, the wipers
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as resume at their previous speed.
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
to become worn more quickly. Switching off and brief wipe
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
130
Driving CONTROLS
Press the lever down. In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it start.
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the Deactivating
standard position. Press the lever back into the standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released. Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of
in front of the interior mirror. the rain sensor.
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
Safety information Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
NOTICE
Windshield washer system
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. Safety information
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
Activating low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐
tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐ washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
tion, arrow 1. is empty.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
131
CONTROLS Driving
Cleaning the windshield

NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers

1. Switch on standby state.
Pull the lever.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are automatically
heated while standby state is switched on.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers to be 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
folded away from the windshield. windshield.
General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
blades or for folding away under frosty condi‐
tions.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
Folding down the wipers
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make system must be reactivated.
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ shield.
ers are folded in when switching on.
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold
the wiper lever down again.
3. Wipers return to their resting position and are
ready again for operation.
132
Driving CONTROLS
Washer fluid
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid
General information for the water-repelling effect on the windows
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐ can lead to damage to the washing system.
voir. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield add silicon-containing additives to the washer
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield fluid.
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be
used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity: NOTICE
0.2 US gal/1 liter. Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
Safety information system. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and
Warning
mixing ratios provided on the containers.
Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a risk
of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐ Overview
tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
or the equivalent is recommended.
gine compartment.
Warning Malfunction
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐ The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐ trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
jury or risk of damage to property. Only add correct readings at temperatures below
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.
133
CONTROLS Driving
Steptronic transmission Parking position P

Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
Concept wheels in selector lever position P.
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
Engage selector lever position P only when the
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐
sibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in situations such as the following:
Safety information
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and
selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐
Warning gaged.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and ▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
ing. and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured gaged.
against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ After the standby state has been switched off
▷ Set the parking brake. when selector lever position N is engaged.
turn the front wheels in the direction of the Engaging selector lever
curb. positions
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a General information
wheel chock. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to
tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐
change from selector lever position P to another
tomatically.
selector lever position.
R is reverse The selection lever position P cannot be

changed until all technical requirements are met.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
Engaging selector lever position D,
N, R
Neutral N
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,
operation:
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 135, in selector lever position N. ▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
tion R.
134
Driving CONTROLS
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐ Rolling or pushing the vehicle
sition P into another selector lever position.
1. Fasten driver's safety belt. General information
2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐ In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
lector lever lock. its own power for a short distance, for instance in
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N

1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on
the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold, refer
to page 127.
3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The 5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
selector lever automatically returns to the lector lever position N.
center position when released. 6. Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle can roll.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
Engaging selector lever position P
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally after approximately 35 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 137.
Kickdown
Press button P. Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
135
CONTROLS Driving
Sport program M/S Activating manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐
Concept tor lever position D, arrow 1.
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driving
style. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Activating the Sport program
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance M1.
Press the selector lever to the left from selector
lever position D. Shifting
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
cluster, for instance S1. ward.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
vated.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start Stop cally in certain situations, for instance when
function are deactivated. Coasting to a standstill speed limits are reached.
and braking phases are used more often to re‐
cover energy. The high-voltage battery can be
Ending the manual mode
charged depending on the driving situation.
Charging may increase the fuel consumption. Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Ending the Sport program
Shift paddles
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
Manual mode M/S you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
136
Driving CONTROLS
General information Displays in the instrument

cluster
Shifting
The selector lever position is dis‐
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
played, for example P.
road speeds.
Short-term manual mode

In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode temporarily. Electronic unlocking of the
After conservative driving in manual mode with‐ transmission lock
out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles
for a certain amount of time, the transmission General information
switches back to automatic mode.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
It is possible to switch into automatic mode as maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
follows:
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling
displayed in the instrument cluster. away.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull
the left shift paddle. Engage selector lever position N
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
Continuous manual mode
2. Press the Start/Stop button. Hold the Start/
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐
Stop button pressed.
dle switches into manual mode permanently.
3. With your free hand, press the button on the
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector
Shifting
lever into selector lever position N and hold,
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
▷ Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.

▷ Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.
▷ Downshifting to the lowest possible gear:
keep the left shift paddle pulled. 4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ 5. Release the brake.
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
137
CONTROLS Driving
For additional information, see the chapter on Displays in the instrument

tow-starting and towing, refer to page 356. cluster
The selected driving mode is dis‐
Driving Dynamics Control played in the instrument cluster.
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the Driving modes
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle. The
vehicle can be adjusted depending on the situa‐ Button Driving Configuration
tion using various driving modes. mode
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
General information
COMFORT
The following systems are affected, for instance:
▷ Engine characteristics. ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
▷ Steptronic transmission. ADAPTIVE
▷ Adaptive chassis.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster. Driving modes in detail
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Backrest width for comfort seats.
COMFORT
When the drive-ready state is switched on, the Concept
COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se‐
Balanced tuning between dynamic and efficient
lected automatically, depending on the equip‐
driving.
ment.
Switching on
Overview
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
SPORT
Concept
Dynamic tuning for higher agility with an opti‐
mized chassis and suspension.
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
138
Driving CONTROLS
SPORT INDIVIDUAL Configuration

Via iDrive:
Concept
1. "My Vehicle"
Individual settings can be adjusted in the SPORT
INDIVIDUAL driving mode. 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving Experience Control"
Configuration 4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
Via iDrive: 5. Select the desired setting.
1. "My Vehicle" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
2. "Vehicle settings" rently used.
3. If necessary, "Driving Experience Control" Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
4. "Configure SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ ADAPTIVE
rently used.
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐ Concept
tings: Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning is
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD". automatically modified to the driving situation
and driving style.
ECO PRO If the navigation system is active, upcoming road
sections are considered.
Concept
The function may be restricted if the navigation
Efficient driving setting. data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
General information
Reducing the energy recovery of the high-volt‐ Switching on
age battery optimizes consumption. The vehicle Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐
is operated more frequently in the coasting driv‐ played in the instrument cluster.
ing condition.
Switching on INDIVIDUAL configuration

Press the button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐ General information
ter. The individual configuration of the driving mode
is stored for the active driver profile. The last set
configuration is activated directly when the driv‐
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL ing mode is called up again.
Concept
Activating configuration of the
Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO driving mode
PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Press the button for the desired driving mode
several times.
139
CONTROLS Displays
Displays
Vehicle features and Service notifications 150
options 4 Displays of the hybrid system 142

5 High-voltage battery charge indicator 142
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 6 Navigation display
Transmission display
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the Status, Driving Dynamics Control 138
selected options or country versions. This also 7 Check Control 145
applies to safety-related functions and systems. Onboard Computer 154
Charging screen 141
served. 8 Variable displays
Speed Limit Info 151
Instrument cluster without enhanced fea‐
Instrument cluster tures:
Range 149
General information 9 Reset miles 154
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be
possible to deactivate the display change in the
instrument cluster via iDrive. Instrument cluster with
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster enhanced features: setting the
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's operating mode
Manual.
Concept
Overview Depending on the equipment, the instrument
cluster can be set to three different operating
modes in addition to the driving mode.
Adjusting
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
1 Fuel gauge 149 4. "Instrument panel"
2 Speedometer 5. Select the desired setting:
3 Time 149 ▷ "STANDARD": all displays on the instru‐
External temperature 149 ment cluster are active.
Variable displays
140
Displays CONTROLS
▷ "REDUCED" all displays on the instru‐ ▷ "Speed limit exceeded": if the speed recog‐
ment cluster are reduced to the essential. nized by Speed Limit Info is exceeded, the
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays on the instru‐ exceeded range is marked red in the speed‐
ment cluster are active. Individual displays ometer.
can be individually selected.
Configuring INDIVIDUAL
▷ "Driving mode display": when the driving
mode is switched into ECO PRO or SPORT,
the instrument cluster automatically switches
into the respective view.
Charging screen
1 Charge state 297 5 Stationary climate control 297

2 Range for electric driving 297 6 Maximum electrical range 297
3 Charging status with charging cable 297 7 End of charging time 297
BMW Wireless Charging status 294 Departure time with timer 297
4 Timer, departure time 297
141
CONTROLS Displays
Displays of the hybrid live parts, for instance orange high-voltage ca‐
bles, even when the batteries are discharged.
system
Display
Displays in the instrument
cluster Instrument cluster without enhanced
features
General information
The following functions of the hybrid system are
displayed:
▷ High-voltage battery charge indicator, refer to
page 142.
▷ Drive-ready state: READY, refer to page 142.
▷ Electric driving: ePOWER, refer to page 142.
▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE, refer to
page 143.
The Onboard Computer in the instrument clus‐
▷ Acceleration boost: eBOOST, refer to ter, refer to page 154, can also indicate the
page 143. charge state of the high-voltage battery.
▷ Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE, refer to
page 143. Drive-ready state: READY
▷ Electric driving: AUTO eDRIVE, refer to READY indicates drive-ready
page 143. state. For additional information,
▷ BATTERY CONTROL, refer to page 143. see Drive-ready state, refer to
The display depends on the system's operating page 120.
condition.
High-voltage battery charge Electric driving: ePOWER

indicator
Concept
Indicates the current charge state of the high-
voltage battery as a percentage.
Safety information
Warning
In ePOWER mode, the range for electric driving
Even when it is indicated that the high-voltage
is colored blue, arrow 1. The range highlighted in
battery is discharged, the high-voltage system
blue can vary depending on the driving situation
is always still under high voltage. There is a risk
and eDRIVE mode.
of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch or change
A pointer indicates the power outputted by the
hybrid drive in a scale, arrow 2.
142
Displays CONTROLS
If the pointer is outside the range highlighted in Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE
blue, the combustion engine is switched on, ar‐
The display becomes active after
row 3.
MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 123,
For further information, please refer to electric is activated via the eDRIVE but‐
driving: ePOWER, refer to page 122. ton.
Energy recovery: CHARGE

Electric driving: AUTO eDRIVE
The display becomes active while
driving electrically after AUTO
eDRIVE, refer to page 123, is acti‐
vated via the eDRIVE button.
BATTERY CONTROL
The display becomes active after
Energy recovery during coasting and braking is BATTERY CONTROL, refer to
indicated as CHARGE in the instrument cluster page 124, is activated via the
depending on the driving mode, see arrow. The eDRIVE button.
high-voltage battery is charged. If the high-volt‐
age battery is completely charged, no energy can The available electric range is conserved for a
be recovered. later point in the trip.
For further information, please refer to Energy re‐

covery CHARGE, refer to page 126. Indications on the Control
Display
Acceleration boost: eBOOST
Overview
If the electric motor supports the combustion en‐

gine, for instance during rapid acceleration, The symbols are shown on the Control Display.
eBOOST, refer to page 125, is displayed. De‐
pending on the available charge state of the
high-voltage battery, there could be more or less
eBOOST available. If the charge state of the
high-voltage battery is low, eBOOST may not be
available.
143
CONTROLS Displays
Sym‐ Meaning Orange: energy flow of the combustion en‐

bol gine.
Blue: energy flow of the hybrid system.
Adapting to the course of the road.
▷ Vehicle states:
Current energy flow.
▷ ePOWER.
Consumption history. ▷ POWER.
▷ eBOOST.
Adapting to the course of the road ▷ CHARGE.
▷ Coasting.
Concept
▷ Charging.
When the navigation system destination guid‐
ance is active, hybrid operation adapts to specific ▷ System requirements of the hybrid system,
route sections. for instance drive system not yet warmed up
to operating temperature.
The hybrid system is used to optimum effect.
▷ Driver request, for instance transmission se‐
Situations which are already underway and situa‐
lector lever in the M/S position.
tions ahead are detected, indicated on the Con‐
trol Display, and the hybrid drive is adapted and
Displaying the current vehicle state
prepared for them.
Via iDrive:
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
ample. 2. "Technology in action"
Functional requirements 3. "eDRIVE"
▷ Selector lever position D engaged. 4. Select the symbol.
▷ AUTO eDRIVE hybrid mode is activated.

Consumption history
Displaying the adaptation to the course of
Concept
the road
The consumption history displays the use of the
Via iDrive:
hybrid system in a chart. The route for determin‐
1. "My Vehicle" ing the consumption values can be adjusted.
2. "Technology in action"
Displaying consumption history
3. "eDRIVE"
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Current vehicle state 2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
General information
The following are displayed:
▷ Active components of the hybrid system.
▷ Direction of the energy flows:
144
Displays CONTROLS
Adjusting the route length

Check Control
Via iDrive:
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in
2. "Scaling:" the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
3. Select the desired setting. the monitored systems.
Resetting consumption history General information

Via iDrive: A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and text
1. Press the button. messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐
cable, in the Head-up Display.
2. "Reset consumption history"
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
The consumption values are reset.
text message may appear on the Control Display.
The odometer for electric driving will be reset
during next refueling.
Indicator/warning lights
Display
Concept
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster
display the status of some functions in the vehi‐
cle and indicate when a malfunction is present in
the monitored systems.
General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
▷ Current average consumption, arrow 1. Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
▷ Bar display for the average consumption for
state is switched on.
the set route length, arrow 2.
▷ Odometer for electric driving, arrow 3. Red lights
The average consumption of the combustion en‐
gine is indicated by a line and a value above the Safety belt reminder
bar display. The indicated value is identical to the
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
average consumption in the Onboard Computer
safety belt on the driver or passenger
and can be reset via the Onboard Computer.
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are placed
on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
145
CONTROLS Displays
Safety belt reminder for rear seats Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐
er's service center or another qualified service
The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐
center or repair shop.
responding rear seat.
DSC, refer to page 200.
Airbag system
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
Airbag system and belt tensioner may deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
not be working. Control is activated
Have the vehicle checked immediately
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
by a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. DSC, refer to page 200, and DTC, refer
to page 202.
Parking brake
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The parking brake is set.
The FTM signals a loss of tire inflation
For releasing the parking brake, refer to
pressure in a tire.
page 127.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Brake system
Run-flat tires, refer to page 325.
Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer's service center or another The indicator light illuminates: the Tire
qualified service center or repair shop. Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐
formation in the Check Control message.
Yellow lights The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated
continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
cannot be detected.
The Brake Assistant function may not ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the with the same radio frequency: after leaving
longer braking distance into account. the area of the interference, the system auto‐
Have the system immediately checked matically becomes active again.
by a dealer's service center or another ▷ In the case of tires with special approval:
qualified service center or repair shop. TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle ice center or another qualified service center
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify or repair shop as needed.
your driving style to the driving circumstances. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐ dealer’s service center or another qualified
tioned. service center or repair shop.
146
Displays CONTROLS
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 318. Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.
Steering system Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
Steering system may not be working. light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified serv‐ Turn signal, refer to page 129.
ice center or repair shop.
Parking lights, headlight
Emissions Parking lights or headlights are switched
▷ The warning light lights up: on.
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the Parking light/low beams, automatic head‐
vehicle checked as soon as possible. light control, refer to page 161.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances: Lane departure warning
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring The indicator light lights up: the system
in the engine. is activated. At least one lane marking
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ was detected and warnings can be is‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious sued.
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐ Lane departure warning, refer to page 186.
ously damage emission control components,
in particular the catalytic converter.
Front fog lights
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to Front fog lights are switched on.
page 342.
Front fog lights, refer to page 165.
Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive
Acoustic pedestrian protection deacti‐ High-beam Assistant
vated or possibly not working. High-beam Assistant is switched on.
Have the system checked by a dealer's High beams are switched on and off au‐
service center or another qualified service center tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
or repair shop. uation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 163.
Green lights
Automatic Hold
Safety belt reminder for rear seats
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle
The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐ is automatically held in place when it is
sponding rear seat. stationary.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 127.
147
CONTROLS Displays
Blue lights 4. "Check Control"

5. Select the SMS text message.
High beams
High beams are switched on. Display
High beams, refer to page 130.
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
Hiding Check Control messages
displayed or stored.
SMS text messages

SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
tor/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages

Press the button on the turn signal lever. Additional information, such as the reason for an
error or malfunction or the required action, can
be called up via Check Control.
Continuous display
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
Some Check Control messages are displayed
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐ Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐
cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐ ther help can be selected.
utively. Via iDrive:
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
2. "Vehicle status"
automatically.
Temporary display 4. "Check Control"
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐ 5. Select the desired text message.
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check 6. Select the desired setting.
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later. Messages after trip completion
Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐
Displaying stored Check Control played again after drive-ready state is switched
messages off.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
148
Displays CONTROLS
Fuel gauge Safety information
Concept Warning
The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed. Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
General information bridges or shady sections of the road. There is
a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to the weather conditions at low temperatures.
vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 300.
Instrument cluster without Time

enhanced features: display
The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.
An arrow beside the fuel pump Setting the time and time format, refer to
symbol shows which side of the page 54.
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Range
Indicator light in the instrument
Concept
cluster
The range indicates the distance that can still be
The yellow indicator light illuminates, covered with the current fuel level and the elec‐
once the fuel reserve is reached. tric energy of the high-voltage battery.
General information
External temperature The range can be displayed as the range for
electric driving or as total range. The total range
General information considers the contents of the fuel tank as well as
the electric energy in the high-voltage battery. If
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
the requirements for electric driving are not met,
signal sounds.
the total range considers the content of the fuel
A Check Control message is displayed. tank only.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads. Various factors, such as the automatic climate
control settings, are taken into account when cal‐
culating the electric range. The electric range
value is adapted dynamically.
The following factors are taken into account
when calculating the range:
▷ Automatic climate control settings.
▷ Driving style.
▷ Traffic conditions.
149
CONTROLS Displays
▷ Program change via Driving Dynamics Con‐ Total range display

trol.
Instrument cluster without en‐
▷ Climate and terrain conditions. hanced features:
With a low remaining range, a Check Control The total range is displayed in the
message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic speedometer.
driving style, for instance fast cornering, the en‐
gine function is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. Service notifications
When the fuel level is low, MAX eDRIVE is auto‐
matically selected to protect the combustion en‐ Concept
gine if the requirements for electric driving are The function displays the service notifications
met. The Steptronic Sport program is not availa‐ and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
ble.
You may continue driving with reduced perform‐ General information
ance and exclusively with electric motor power.
After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐
ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
Safety information tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
NOTICE A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
With a driving range of less than ice notifications from your vehicle key.
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have Some information on service notifications can
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ also be shown on the BMW display key.
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly. Display
Detailed information on service

Range display, electric motor notifications
Instrument cluster without en‐ More information on the type of service required
hanced features: may be displayed on the Control Display.
In MAX eDRIVE mode, the elec‐ Via iDrive:
tric range can be displayed via the
Onboard Computer in the instru‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
ment cluster, refer to page 154. 2. "Vehicle status"
The display indicates that the
high-voltage battery is almost fully 4. "Service required"
discharged or the electric drive is Maintenance and service measures and le‐
currently not available. gally mandated inspections are displayed.
5. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
150
Displays CONTROLS
Symbols Gear shift indicator

Sym‐ Description
bols Concept
The system recommends the most efficient gear
No service is currently required.
for the current driving situation.
The time for recommended mainte‐ General information

nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ Depending on the design and country version,
tion is approaching. the gear shift indicator may be active in the
manual mode of the Steptronic transmission.
The time for recommended mainte‐
nance has already passed.
displaying
Entering appointment dates Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐ the instrument cluster.
spections. On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are gaged gear is displayed.
set correctly. Example Description
Via iDrive:
Efficient gear is set.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Shift into efficient gear.
4. "Service required"
5. "Vehicle inspection"
6. "Date:"
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info

Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally man‐ Concept
dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐
Speed Limit Info shows the current valid maxi‐
mitted to your dealer’s service center before your
mum speed in the instrument cluster.
vehicle is due for service.
You can check when your dealer’s service center General information
was notified.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
Via iDrive: tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
1. "My Vehicle" as overhead sign posts.
2. "Vehicle status" Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐
4. "Teleservice Call"
151
CONTROLS Displays
nored depending on the situation in the instru‐ Display via operating mode of the
ment cluster and the Head-up Display. instrument cluster
With the navigation system, the system takes The Speed Limit Info displays are shown or hid‐
into account the information stored in the naviga‐ den via the operating mode of the instrument
tion data and also displays speed limits present cluster.
on routes without signs.
The Speed Limit Info is displayed in the following
operating modes: "STANDARD" or
Safety information "INDIVIDUAL"
Speed Limit Info is not displayed in the following
Warning operating mode: "REDUCED"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Adjusting the operating mode of the instrument
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility cluster, refer to page 140.
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch Display via iDrive
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
propriate.
3. "Displays"
Overview 4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Road signs"
Camera
Display
Speed Limit Info

Depending on equipment: current
speed limit.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Displaying Speed Limit Info Depending on equipment: Speed

Limit Info not available.
General information
Depending on the equipment, Speed Limit Info
is displayed permanently via the operating mode
of the instrument cluster or via iDrive in the in‐
strument cluster or in the Head-up Display where
required.
152
Displays CONTROLS
System limits Selection lists

The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
General information
uations:
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fol‐
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
lowing can be displayed or operated using the
▷ When traffic signs are fully or partially con‐ buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering
cealed by objects, stickers or paint. wheel and via the displays in the instrument clus‐
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front ter and the Head-up Display:
of you. ▷ Current audio source.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong ▷ Phone redial.
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior Displaying and using the list
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc. Button Function
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
Open current entertainment
porarily switched off due to excessively high
source.
temperatures.
Pressing the button again will
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
close the currently displayed
camera.
list.
▷ If the speed limits or road data stored in the
navigation system are incorrect. Show list of most recent tele‐
phone calls.
▷ If the speed limits vary with the time of day
and the day of the week. Turn the thumbwheel: select
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ entertainment source or list en‐
tem. try.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such Press the thumbwheel: confirm
as due to changes in road routing. the setting.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs. The currently selected list can
be displayed in the instrument
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
cluster by turning the thumb‐
signs applied to them.
wheel.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel
road are detected.
▷ In the presence of country-specific signs and
road configurations.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
153
CONTROLS Displays
Display ▷ Miles and trip miles.

▷ Navigation data.
When destination guidance is activated in the
navigation system.
▷ Instrument cluster without enhanced fea‐
tures:
Charge state of the high-voltage battery.
▷ Consumption display.
▷ Average consumption and average speed.
Depending on the equipment version, the list in ▷ Average consumption since delivery from the
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐ factory.
tration. ▷ Engine temperature display.
Adjusting information for

Onboard Computer in the Onboard Computer
instrument cluster For some information of the Onboard Computer,
it is possible to set whether it can be called up in
the instrument cluster.
Concept
Via iDrive:
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
age values. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
Calling up information
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Onboard info"
rently used.
Information in detail
Odometer and trip odometer

Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Information is displayed in the instrument cluster. Displaying/resetting miles
Pressing the button repeatedly displays addi‐ ▷ Press the knob to display the
tional information. trip miles.
Information at a glance switched off, miles and trip
miles are displayed.
The following information can be displayed on
the Onboard Computer:
154
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Keep the knob pressed down to reset the trip Instrument cluster without
miles. enhanced features: charge state of
the high-voltage battery
Display
Concept
The current charge state of the high-voltage bat‐
tery can be shown in the form of a bar display in
the Onboard Computer.
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Navigation data
General information ▷ Marking for the adjusted charge state of the

The estimated time of arrival and the distance re‐ BATTERY CONTROL function, refer to
maining to the destination are displayed if a des‐ page 124, arrow 1.
tination is entered in the navigation system be‐ ▷ Current electric range, arrow 2.
fore the trip is started.
Display Consumption display
General information
The average consumption values can be shown
in the form of a bar display in the Onboard Com‐
puter. The odometer for electric driving will be
reset during next refueling.
The electric consumption values are displayed in
MAX eDRIVE.
▷ Time of arrival, arrow 1.

▷ Distance to destination, arrow 2.
155
CONTROLS Displays
Display Display
▷ Odometer for electric driving, arrow 1. ▷ Average speed, arrow 1.

▷ Average consumption, arrow 2. ▷ Average consumption, arrow 2.
▷ Current consumption, arrow 3.
Engine temperature display
Average speed and average
consumption General information
Displays the current engine temperature, based
General information on a combination of coolant and engine oil tem‐
Average speed and average consumption are perature. As soon as the optimum operating
calculated for the distance traveled since the last temperature has been attained, the indicator is in
reset in the Onboard Computer. the center position.
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the engine,
engine manually stopped are not included in the become too hot, a Check Control message is
calculation of the average speed. displayed too.
To check the coolant level, refer to page 339.
Resetting average values
Display
Press and hold the button on the turn signal

lever.
156
Displays CONTROLS
Onboard Computer on the 3. "Trip computer"

4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
Control Display
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are reset
Concept approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐ come to a standstill.
cle data on the Control Display, such as average
5. If necessary, "OK"
values.
General information Sport displays

Two types of Onboard Computers are available
on the Control Display:
General information
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the current
consumption, are displayed. The values can
values for performance and torque can be dis‐
be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐
view of a specific route and can be reset as Displays
often as necessary.
Via iDrive:
Calling up the Onboard 1. "My Vehicle"
Computer or trip computer 2. "Technology in action"
Via iDrive: 3. "Sport displays"
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information" Speed warning
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Concept
Resetting the Onboard
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
Computer cause a warning to be issued.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" General information

2. "Driving information" The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
3. "Onboard info"
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK" Adjusting
Via iDrive:
Resetting the trip computer
1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Speed warning"
2. "Driving information"
4. "Warning at:"
157
CONTROLS Displays
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is Symbols Description

displayed.
"Engine oil level": Electronic en‐
gine oil level check, refer to
page 335.
Via iDrive: "Check Control": displaying
stored Check Control mes‐
1. "My Vehicle" sages, refer to page 148.
"Service required": displaying
3. "Speed warning" service notifications, refer to
4. "Speed warning" page 150.
"Teleservice Call": Service Re‐

Setting your current speed as quest.
the speed warning
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Head-up Display
Concept
3. "Speed warning"
This system projects important information into
4. "Select current speed"
the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
Vehicle status his or her eyes from the road.
General information
General information
Follow the information on cleaning the Head-up
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
Display, refer to page 361.
formed for several systems.
Overview
Opening the vehicle status
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
Symbols Description
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the

run-flat tires, refer to page 325.
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status

of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM, refer to page 318.
158
Displays CONTROLS
Switching on/off The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" Selecting displays in the Head-up

2. "iDrive settings" Display
3. "Displays" Via iDrive:
4. "Head-Up Display" 1. "My Vehicle"
5. "Head-Up Display" 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
Display
4. "Head-Up Display"
Overview 5. "INDIVIDUAL"
The following information is displayed on the 6. Select the desired setting.

Head-up Display: The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
▷ Vehicle speed. rently used.
▷ Navigation instructions.
Setting the brightness
▷ Check Control messages.
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster. ambient brightness.
▷ Driver assistance systems. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly Via iDrive:
as needed.
1. "My Vehicle"
Selecting the view 2. "iDrive settings"
Various views are available for the Head-up Dis‐ 3. "Displays"
play. 4. "Head-Up Display"
Via iDrive: 5. "Brightness"
1. "My Vehicle" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
2. "iDrive settings" ness is set.
3. "Displays" 7. Press the Controller.
4. "Head-Up Display" When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting.
▷ "STANDARD": all displays in the Head-up
Display are active. Adjusting the height
▷ "REDUCED": the displays in the Head-up Via iDrive:
Display are reduced to the minimum.
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays in the Head-up
Display are active. Individual displays 2. "iDrive settings"
such as Check Control messages can be 3. "Displays"
selected individually. 4. "Head-Up Display"
159
CONTROLS Displays
5. "Height" A film in the windshield prevents double images

6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is from being generated.
reached. For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have
7. Press the Controller. the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop, if necessary.
rently used.
The height of the Head-up Display can also be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 111.
Setting the rotation

The Head-up Display view can be rotated.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
selected.
Visibility of the display

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to
display a precise image.
160
Lights CONTROLS
Lights
Vehicle features and Symbol Function
options Parking lights.

cific and optional features offered with the series. Automatic headlight control.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Adaptive light functions.
selected options or country versions. This also Low beams.
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Instrument lighting.
served.
Right roadside parking light.

Overview
Left roadside parking light.
Switches in the vehicle
Parking lights, low beams

and roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The light switch element is located next to the If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
steering wheel. ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off after a period of time.
Symbol Function
Parking lights
Front fog lights.
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Night Vision, refer to page 182. Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to switch on drive-
Lights off. ready state.
Daytime running lights.
161
CONTROLS Lights
Low beams Headlight courtesy delay feature

Position of switch:
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state
General information
is switched on. The low beams stay illuminated for a particular
time if the high beams are switched on after the
Roadside parking lights drive-ready state is switched off.
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside

Setting the duration
parking light can be switched on.
Via iDrive:
Button Function
1. "My Vehicle"
Right roadside parking light on/off.
3. "Lighting"
Left roadside parking light on/off.
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy delay Automatic headlight
feature control
Welcome lights
Concept
General information The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐
example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
ing of the vehicle can be set individually.
cipitation.
General information
Position of switch: ,
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
Via iDrive: cause the lights to be switched on.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings" Activating
3. "Lighting" Position of switch:
4. "Exterior lighting" The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐

luminated when the low beams are switched on.
▷ "Welcome lights" System limits
Individual light functions are switched on The automatic headlight control cannot serve as
for a limited time. a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
ing conditions.
162
Lights CONTROLS
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Activating

fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch
Position of switch:
the lights on manually.
The adaptive light functions are active when the
drive-ready state is switched on.
Daytime running lights
Adaptive Light Control
General information Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows the
Position of switch: , ,
course of the road.
The daytime running lights light up when drive-
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
ready state is switched on. After drive-ready
Light Control does not swivel to the opposite
state is switched off, the parking lights light up in
lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
position .
Cornering light
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
In some countries, daytime running lights are
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
vate the daytime running lights.
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
Via iDrive: certain speed.
1. "My Vehicle" The cornering light is automatically switched on
2. "Vehicle settings" depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐
cable, the use of turn signals.
3. "Lighting"
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may
4. "Exterior lighting" be automatically switched on regardless of the
5. "Daytime running lamps" steering angle.
rently used.
Adaptive headlight range
control
Adaptive light functions
The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐
Concept ances out acceleration and braking processes as
well as the vehicle load conditions in order to
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐
avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of
tion of the roadway.
the road is optimized.
General information
The adaptive light functions may consist of one High-beam Assistant
system or multiple systems, depending on the
equipment version:
Concept
▷ Adaptive Light Control, refer to page 163.
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 163. participants early on and automatically switches
163
CONTROLS Lights
the high beams on or off depending on the traffic Sensitivity of the high-beam
situation. Assistant
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐ be adjusted.
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high
beams are not switched on by the system. Safety information
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities. Warning
The high beams can be switched on and off If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐
manually at any time. ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be
momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident.
If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐
Activating/deactivating tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐
coming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
Switch off the high beams manually if required.
Adjusting the sensitivity

Pull the turn signal lever for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds. The system responds more
sensitively.
Position of switch:
Press the button on the turn signal lever. Resetting the sensitivity
Pull the turn signal lever again for approx. 10 sec‐
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ onds.
ter is illuminated when the low beams are
The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant is re‐
switched on.
set to the factory settings.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams. System limits
The blue indicator light in the instrument The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
cluster lights up when the system stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when
switches on the high beams. to use the high beams. In situation that require
this, therefore switch off manually.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when The system is not fully functional in the following
manually switching the high beams on and off, situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
refer to page 130. sary:
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
button on the turn signal lever. as fog or heavy precipitation.
164
Lights CONTROLS
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as

pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
Instrument lighting
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; or at animal crossings. Functional requirement
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, The parking lights or low beams must be
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming switched on to adjust the brightness.
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐ Adjusting
ence of highly reflective signs. Adjust the brightness with the
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior thumbwheel.
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Interior lights
Front fog lights
General information
Concept Depending on the equipment version, interior
The front fog lights work alongside the low lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐
beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway. ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐
trolled.
The low beams must be switched on before Overview
switching on the front fog lights.
Buttons in the vehicle
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The green indicator light lights up if the
front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control is activated, the

low beams will come on automatically when you
switch on the front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched Interior lights
on.
Reading lights
165
CONTROLS Lights
Switching the interior lights Selecting the color scheme

on/off Via iDrive:
Press the button. 1. "My Vehicle"
To switch off permanently: press the button and
3. "Lighting"
hold for approx. 3 seconds.
4. "Interior lighting"
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
be switched on and off independently. The but‐ 5. "Color"
ton is located in the rear roofliner. 6. Select the desired setting.
Switching the reading lights Setting the brightness

on/off Via iDrive:
Press the button. 1. "My Vehicle"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐
3. "Lighting"
ing lights are located next to the interior lights in
the front and rear. 4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
Ambient light 6. Select the desired setting.
General information Dimmed while driving

Depending on the equipment version, lighting Via iDrive:
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
1. "My Vehicle"
rior.
Switching on/off 3. "Lighting"
The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐ 4. "Interior lighting"
cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐ 5. "Dimmed for night driving"
cle is locked.
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
locked.
file currently used.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" Bowers & Wilkins Diamond
2. "Vehicle settings" Surround Sound System
3. "Lighting"
General information
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
5. "Ambient lighting"
Brightness can be individually set.
If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will be
switched off.
166
Lights CONTROLS
Switching on/off
The speaker lighting is switched on when the ve‐
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the ve‐
hicle is locked.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Lighting"
5. "Bowers & Wilkins"
Setting the brightness

Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Lighting"
5. "Brightness"
167
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In the event of a side impact, the side airbag pro‐
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts tects the side of the body in the chest and lap
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ area.
equate protection.
168
Safety CONTROLS
Head airbag ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads

away from the side airbag.
In the event of a side impact, the head airbag
protects the head. ▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
Ejection Mitigation son.
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the senger side must stay clear - do not attach
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
through side windows during rollovers or side im‐ tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
pact events. devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
Knee airbag cover panels, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of
a frontal impact. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Protective effect ▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects to the front passenger seat that
General information are not specifically suited for seats with
integrated side airbags.
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
Information on optimum effect of the ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
airbags nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, and the seats.
Warning
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag Even when you follow all instructions very
system cannot provide protection as intended closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐ short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
timum protective effect of the airbag system. ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the Customer Relations for further information.
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the Warnings and information on the airbags are also
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the found on the sun visors.
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
possible when the airbag is triggered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
the dashboard.
169
CONTROLS Safety
Functional readiness of the Automatic deactivation of the

airbag system front-seat passenger airbags
Safety information Concept

The system reads if the front passenger seat is
Warning occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐
ance.
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐ Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
jury. Do not touch individual components. senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information
Warning Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
structions for children on the front passenger
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
seat, see Children.
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐
Safety information
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by Warning
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
When drive-ready state is switched on, or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
the warning light in the instrument clus‐ senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
ter lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the function readiness of the entire airbag sys‐
tem and the belt tensioners. Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
Malfunction When transporting older children and adults, the
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated
▷ Warning light does not come on in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
when drive-ready state is switched cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
on. lights up.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously. In this case, change the sitting position so that
Have the system checked. the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to establish the desired condi‐
tion, do not transport the person in the front pas‐
senger seat.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
170
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or restraint system has been detected and the
other items to the front passenger seat un‐ front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat. Strength of the driver's and
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the front-seat passenger airbag
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐ The explosive power that activates driver's/front-
tem is to be installed on it. seat passenger airbags very much depends on
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that can the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
push against the seat from below. To maintain the accuracy of this function over
▷ No moisture in or on the seat. the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Indicator light for the front-seat Display.
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger Calibrating the front seats
airbag in the roofliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag. Warning
The light indicates whether the airbags are either There is a risk of jamming when moving the
activated or deactivated. seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
briefly lights up and then indicates whether the ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
airbags are either activated or deactivated. ment.
▷ The indicator light lights up
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
when a child is properly
trol Display.
seated in a child restraint sys‐
tem or when the seat is 1. Press the switch and move the respective
empty. The airbags on the seat all the way forward, until it stops.
front passenger side are not
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
activated.
moves forward slightly.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐ The calibration procedure is completed when the
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐ message on the Control Display disappears.
vated. If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
Detected child restraint systems If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
The system generally detects children seated in
possible.
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
171
CONTROLS Safety
Intelligent Safety style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the Warning
driver assistance systems.
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
General information Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐ risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
that can help prevent an imminent collision.
▷ Front collision mitigation, refer to page 173.
Overview
▷ Evasion Assistant, refer to page 177.
▷ Person warning with City braking function, re‐ Button in the vehicle
fer to page 180.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐
tection, refer to page 182.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 186.
▷ Blind spot collision warning, refer to
page 189.
▷ Side collision mitigation, refer to page 193.
Safety information
Intelligent Safety
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Switching on/off
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
gent Safety systems activate according to the
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
last setting.
propriate.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent

Warning Safety systems are switched on.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings gent Safety systems are switched off
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a or currently unavailable.
manner that is not consistent with their normal Button does not light up: all Intelligent
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving Safety systems are switched off.
172
Safety CONTROLS
Press the button: ▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.

The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ ▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.
tem is displayed. Intersection collision warning when equipped
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, with a radar sensor: in addition, a warning is is‐
all systems are now switched on. sued at intersections and junctions if a risk of col‐
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the lision with crossing traffic is detected.
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ The approach control warning is available even if
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ cruise control has been deactivated.
ual settings are activated and stored for the With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting tentionally, the approach control warning and
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
are activated. tem reactions.
Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐ The system issues a two-phase warning of a
ing settings are switched between: possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn‐
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are ings may vary with the current driving situation.
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
sub-functions, for instance setting for warning
time.
Detection range
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Objects that the system can detect are taken

into account.
Front collision mitigation Intersection collision warning: the system is also
able to detect vehicles crossing your direction of
Concept travel when these vehicles enter into the detec‐
The system may prevent some accidents. In the tion range of the system.
event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐
pact speed. Safety information
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed. Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
General information driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐
tem is controlled by the following sensors:
173
CONTROLS Safety
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Camera

propriate.
Warning
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
clean and clear.
Warning With radar sensor

Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Intelligent Safety

Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
174
Safety CONTROLS
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the Warning with braking function

equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ Display
ual settings are activated and stored for the
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
are activated.
Symbol Measure
Press the button repeatedly.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween: Brake and increase distance.
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the signal sounds: acute warning.
subfunctions.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are ver, if necessary.
Intersection collision warning:
vidually switched off. Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning when
Press and hold this button. vehicles cross your direction of
travel.
switched off. Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Prewarning

Safety systems are switched on. This warning is provided, for instance when there
is impending danger of a collision or the distance
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ to the vehicle ahead is too small.
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable. If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off. Acute warning with braking function
An acute warning is displayed in case of the im‐
Setting the warning time minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
Via iDrive: proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
1. "My Vehicle"
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. If an
2. "Vehicle settings" acute warning is provided, the system may pro‐
3. "Intelligent Safety" vide assistance, such as through braking, when
4. "Frontal Collision Warn." there is risk of collision.
5. Select the desired setting. Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
The selected time is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
175
CONTROLS Safety
Brake intervention, City braking The driver may interrupt the braking intervention
function function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a
warning is active, the maximum braking force is Intersection collision warning: brake intervention
used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal is not performed in the event of cross traffic.
must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐ The system’s ability to detect objects may be
fully. limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
The system may also assist in braking if there is formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
a risk of collision. limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
System limits
The braking intervention takes place up to ap‐
prox. 50 mph/80 km/h.
Safety information
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. Warning
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention The system is designed to operate in certain
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
by actively moving the steering wheel. tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
limitations of the system and actively intervene
tem’s operation and limitations.
as warranted.
With radar sensor: brake Upper speed limit

intervention
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
warning is active, the maximum braking force is temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐
used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal low this speed, the system is reactivated.
must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐
Intersection collision warning: the vehicle re‐
fully.
sponds to crossing traffic if its own speed is be‐
The system may also assist in braking if there is low approx. 40 mph/65 km/h.
a risk of collision.
The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill. Detection range
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle The system's detection potential is limited.
stability has not been restricted, for instance by Thus, a system reaction might not come or
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. might come late.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the The following situations may not be detected, for
braking intervention occurs as a brief braking instance:
pressure. No automatic delay occurs.
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
176
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
or sharply decelerating vehicles. actions.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Evasion Assistant
▷ Intersection collision warning: crossing vehi‐
cles if their speed is higher than your own
speed.
Concept
The system supports the driver in making eva‐
Functional limitations sive maneuvers in certain situations, such as
when obstacles suddenly appear.
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
General information
The system issues a warning and intervenes to
▷ In tight curves.
support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐ possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐
terior mirror. viding targeted steering support.
porarily switched off due to excessively high Detection range
temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
Objects that the system can detect are taken
sensors are dirty or covered.
into account.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: after
improperly performed work on the vehicle
paint in the area of the radar sensors. Safety information
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐ Warning
pact the function of the radar sensors and may The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
even cause them to fail. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
Warning sensitivity Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
example the warning time, the more warnings are propriate.
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
177
CONTROLS Safety
Warning
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
and actively intervene where appropriate. Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Overview
Radar sensors Camera

The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front center bumper. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
▷ Front collision mitigation, refer to page 173, is
switched on.
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
the vehicle.
Switching on/off
Front side bumper. The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
178
Safety CONTROLS
Warning with evasion support Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
Display in the instrument cluster The following situations may not be detected, for
A warning symbol appears in the instrument example:
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
with a detected vehicle is imminent. them at high speed.
Symbol Measure ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,

or sharply decelerating vehicles.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
Brake and increase distance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning. Functional limitations
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐ The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
ver, if necessary. lowing situations:
Acute warning with evasion support ▷ In tight curves.
An acute warning is displayed when there is an ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
approaching another object at a high speed. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
system is designed to provide assistance by tak‐ terior mirror.
ing evasive action when there is a risk of collision. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
Acute warnings may be provided even when porarily switched off due to excessively high
there has been no prior warning. temperatures.
System limits via the Start/Stop button.
Safety information after vehicle delivery.
Warning of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
The system is designed to operate in certain low in the sky.
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ ▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ sensors are dirty or covered.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ Depending on the equipment version: after
of damage to property. Actively intervene as improperly performed work on the vehicle
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ paint in the area of the radar sensors.
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
pact the function of the radar sensors and may
Detection range even cause them to fail.
The system's detection potential is limited.
179
CONTROLS Safety
Person warning with City Safety information

braking function
Warning
Concept The system cannot serve as a substitute for the

The system may prevent some accidents with and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
pedestrians. When driving at city speeds, the Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
system will issue a warning if there is imminent traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
risk of a collision with pedestrians, and support propriate.
with a braking function.
General information
Warning
The system is active at speeds of approx.
3 mph/5 km/h up to approx. 40 mph/65 km/h.
The system reacts to people who are within the to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
detection range of the system. or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
The camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐ manner that is not consistent with their normal
trols the system. use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
Detection range and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐

ided into two areas:
Overview
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the Button in the vehicle
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrows 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
180
Safety CONTROLS
Intelligent Safety "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are

subfunctions.
Camera "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
Press and hold this button.

switched off.
Button Status
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror Safety systems are switched on.
clean and clear.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
Switching on/off or currently unavailable.

Safety systems are switched off.
driving off.
Warning with braking function
Display
Press the button.
If a collision with a detected person is imminent,
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ a warning symbol appears on the instrument
tem is displayed. cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ Alternatively, depending on the vehicle
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ equipment, a red warning triangle lights
ual settings are activated and stored for the up in the instrument cluster.
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu Intervene immediately by braking or make an
are activated. evasive maneuver.
Press the button repeatedly. Braking intervention

The following settings are switched be‐ The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a
tween: warning is active, the maximum braking force is
used when the brake is applied. This requires the
brake pedal to be depressed sufficiently quickly
and forcefully.
181
CONTROLS Safety
If there is a risk of collision, the system may also ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
assist with braking. 32 in/80 cm.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop. Functional limitations
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle The system may not be fully functional or may
stability has not been restricted, for instance by not be available in the following situations:
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention ▷ In tight curves.
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or ▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
by actively moving the steering wheel. activated, for instance DSC OFF.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐ shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the terior mirror.
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
temperatures.
System limits
Safety information via the Start/Stop button.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ low in the sky.
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ When it is dark outside.
Night Vision with
tem’s operation and limitations. pedestrian and animal
detection
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is limited. Concept
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
sued late. tion is a night vision system.
The following situations may not be detected, for An infrared camera scans the area in front of the
instance: vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedes‐
trians and animals on the street. The system de‐
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
tects warm objects that are similar in shape to
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐ human beings or animals. If necessary, the ther‐
cause of the viewing angle or contour. mal image can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. play.
182
Safety CONTROLS
General information In addition, the system also detects animals

above a certain minimum size, for instance deer.
Thermal image Display on the Control Display with thermal im‐
age activated:
▷ People detected by the system: in light yel‐
low.
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark yel‐
low.
Range of object detection, with good ambient

conditions:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
The image shows the heat radiated by objects in 330 ft/100 m.
the field of view of the camera. ▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold 490 ft/150 m.
objects a dark appearance. ▷ Detection of medium animals: up to approx.
The ability to detect an object depends on the 230 ft/70 m.
temperature difference between the object and Environmental influences can limit the availability
the background and on the level of heat radiation of object detection.
emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
temperature to the environment or that radiate located in a residential area, the animal detection
very little heat are difficult to detect. is temporarily switched off.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient Safety information
light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on. Warning
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
fraction of a second. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
Pedestrian and animal detection Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
propriate.
Warning
Object detection and warning only functions in manner that is not consistent with their normal
darkness. use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
Objects whose form is similar to people with suf‐
ficient heat radiation are detected.
183
CONTROLS Safety
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the
and actively intervene where appropriate. camera objective is cleaned at regular intervals
when the windshield washer system, refer to
page 131, is activated.
Overview
Switching on
When it is dark outside, the system is automati‐
cally active after every driving off.
Switching on the thermal image

The thermal image from the Night Vision camera
can be displayed on the Control Display in addi‐
tion to the warning function. This function has no
effect on object detection.
Intelligent Safety Press the button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the

Control Display.
Adjusting the thermal image

Brightness and contrast can be adjusted, when
the thermal image is switched on.
Via iDrive:
1. Select brightness or contrast.

Thermal image ▷ "Brightness".
▷ "Contrast".
2. Set the desired value.
Camera
Warning function
Display
Symbol Meaning
Person warning.
Animal warning.
The camera is automatically heated when the ex‐
ternal temperatures are low.
184
Safety CONTROLS
Symbol Meaning With animal warnings, no distinction is made be‐

tween the central or expanded area.
Symbol lights up Prewarning.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
red.
the direction of the steering angle and changes
Symbol flashes Acute warning. with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐
red and a signal creases, the area becomes, for instance longer
sounds. and wider.
Alternatively, depending on
the vehicle equipment, a Prewarning
red warning triangle lights Prewarning for persons is displayed when a per‐
up or flashes in the instru‐ son is detected in the central area immediately in
ment cluster. front of the vehicle as well as on the left or right
side in the extended area.
The displayed symbol may vary and shows the Prewarning for animals is displayed when an ani‐
side of the road on which the person or animal mal is detected in the front of the vehicle.
was detected.
If a prewarning is issued, intervene by braking or
making an evasive maneuver.
Warning of people or animals in
danger Acute warning
If a collision with a person or an animal detected Acute warning is displayed if a person or an ani‐
in this way is imminent, a warning symbol ap‐ mal is detected in direct proximity in front of the
pears on the instrument cluster and in the Head- vehicle.
up Display.
If an acute warning is issued, brake or make an
Although both the shape and the heat radiation evasive maneuver immediately.
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
Display in the Head-up Display
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster.
System limits
Basic limits
lowing situations:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight
curves.
The warning area for the person warning con‐
sists of two parts: ▷ If the camera is soiled or damaged.
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
vehicle. ▷ At very high external temperatures.
▷ Expanded area, arrows 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
185
CONTROLS Safety
Limits of pedestrian and animal Vehicles with side collision mitigation: if in the
detection speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
marking is crossed, the system intervenes with a
In some situations, it may occur that pedestrians
brief active steering intervention in addition to vi‐
are detected as animals or animals as pedes‐
brating. The system thus helps keep the vehicle
trians.
in the lane.
Small animals are not detected by the object de‐
tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
Safety information
the image.
Limited detection, for instance in the following
circumstances: Warning
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
covered, especially when their heads are cov‐ driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
ered. and traffic safety. There is a risk of accident.
▷ People who are not in an upright position, for
instance lying down.
propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., re‐ sponse to a warning.
cumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, for in‐
stance after an accident. Warning
Lane departure warning stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
Concept manner that is not consistent with their normal
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐ use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
cle on roads with lane markings is about to leave style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
the lane. and actively intervene where appropriate.
General information
This camera-based system warns starting at a
The camera must detect the lane markings for
minimum speed.
the lane departure warning to be active.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
The time of the warning may vary depending on
the current driving situation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
186
Safety CONTROLS
Overview "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the

Button in the vehicle tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
are activated.

tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
Intelligent Safety subfunctions.
Camera

switched off.
Button Status

Safety systems are switched on.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
clean and clear. gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Switching on/off Button does not light up: all Intelligent

The lane departure warning activates automati‐ Setting the warning frequency
cally after departure if the function was switched Via iDrive:
on at the end of the last trip.
1. "My Vehicle"
Switching on/off manually 2. "Vehicle settings"
Press the button. 3. "Intelligent Safety"
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ 4. "Lane Departure Warn."
tem is displayed. 5. Select the desired setting.
187
CONTROLS Safety
▷ "Always": the system issues a warning Display in the instrument cluster

whenever a hazardous situation is de‐
tected. The symbol illuminates green: at least
one lane marking was detected and
▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐ warnings can be issued.
pressed depending on the situation,
for instance during passing without a turn
signal or when purposely driving over lane Warning function
markings in curves.
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued. If you leave the lane
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
file currently used. been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐
cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐
Setting the intensity of the steering ting.
wheel vibration When the turn signal is switched on before a lane
Via iDrive: charge, a warning is not issued.
1. "My Vehicle" With side collision mitigation

2. "Vehicle settings" When in the speed range up to
3. "Steering wheel vibration" 130 mph/210 km/h a lane marking is crossed,
4. Select the desired setting. the system intervenes with a brief active steering
intervention in addition to vibrating. The steering
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ intervention helps keep the vehicle in the lane.
tems and stored for the driver profile currently The steering intervention can be noticed on the
used. steering wheel and can be manually overridden
at any time.
Vehicles with side collision
mitigation: turn steering Warning signal
intervention on/off Depending on the equipment version: in the
The steering intervention can be switched on event of multiple active steering interventions by
and off separately for blind spot collision warning the system within 3 minutes without the driver's
and lane departure warning. intervention at the steering wheel, an acoustic
Via iDrive: warning will sound. A short warning signal will
sound at the second steering intervention. Be‐
1. "My Vehicle" ginning with the third steering intervention, an
2. "Vehicle settings" continuous warning will sound.
3. "Intelligent Safety" In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐
4. "Steering intervention" played.
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ The warning signal and Check-Control message
file currently used. are an encouragement to pay closer attention to
the lane.
End of warning
For instance, the warning will be canceled in the
following situations:
188
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
▷ When returning to your own lane. porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
System limits
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
Safety information
Warning Blind spot collision warning

The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ Concept
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ Blind spot collision warning detects vehicles in
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐
of damage to property. Actively intervene as hind in the adjacent lane. A warning is issued in
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ various gradations in these situations.
General information
Functional limitations
lowing situations:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
dirt or water. the area behind and next to the vehicle when
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. traveling faster than a minimum speed.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects. The minimum speed is country-specific and is
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
of you. systems.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because The system indicates whether there are vehicles
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
low in the sky. behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed.
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
terior mirror.
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
189
CONTROLS Safety
The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the Radar sensors
steering wheel vibrates.
Vehicles with side collision mitigation: at speeds
between 45 mph/70 km/h and
130 mph/210 km/h, the system can intervene
with a brief active steering intervention and help
to return the vehicle into the lane.
Safety information
Warning The radar sensors are located in the rear

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the bumper.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. sensors clean and unobstructed.
propriate.
Switching on/off
Blind spot collision warning is automatically acti‐
Warning
vated after departure if the function was
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ switched on at the end of the last trip.
manner that is not consistent with their normal Press the button.
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely tem is displayed.
Overview "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the

tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
Button in the vehicle
are activated.

tween:
Intelligent Safety subfunctions.
190
Safety CONTROLS
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are Vehicles with side collision
switched on according to the individual settings. mitigation: switching steering
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ intervention on/off
vidually switched off. The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for blind spot collision warning
Press and hold this button. and lane departure warning.
All Intelligent Safety systems are Via iDrive:
switched off.
1. "My Vehicle"
Button Status 2. "Vehicle settings"
Button lights up green: all Intelligent 3. "Intelligent Safety"
Safety systems are switched on. 4. "Steering intervention"
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
gent Safety systems are switched off rently used.
or currently unavailable.
Warning function
Light in the exterior mirror
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Blind Spot Detection"
"Off": with this setting, no warning is output.
Prewarning
rently used. The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates
when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐
proaching from behind.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
Acute warning
Via iDrive:
When the turn signal is switched on while a vehi‐
1. "My Vehicle" cle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vi‐
2. "Vehicle settings" brates briefly and the light in the exterior mirror
flashes brightly.
3. "Steering wheel vibration"
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the criti‐
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ cal zone.
tems and stored for the driver profile currently
used.
191
CONTROLS Safety
With side collision mitigation ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

When at speeds between 45 mph/70 km/h and ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
130 mph/210 km/h the vibrating steering wheel for instance by stickers.
is ignored and the lane marking crossed, the sys‐ ▷ After improperly performed work on the vehi‐
tem intervenes with a brief active steering inter‐ cle paint.
vention. The steering intervention helps return
▷ If cargo protrudes.
the vehicle into the lane. The steering interven‐
tion can be noticed on the steering wheel and Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
can be manually overridden at any time. the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
Flashing of the light even cause them to fail.
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking For vehicles with side collision mitigation, the
serves as system self-test. steering intervention can be limited, for instance
in the following situation:
System limits ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
Safety information such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
Warning
▷ When lane markings are not white.
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ ▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of you.
of damage to property. Actively intervene as ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
terior mirror.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temperatures.
temporarily.
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐
sponds according to the setting. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
Functional limitations A Check Control message is displayed when the
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ system is not fully functional.
lowing situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
Displaying warnings
much faster than your own. Depending on the selected warning settings,
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can
192
Safety CONTROLS
be displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐

cess of premature warnings of critical situations. Warning
Side collision mitigation to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
Concept manner that is not consistent with their normal
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐ use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
sions. style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
General information
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision mitigation with steering inter‐
vention to be active.
Overview
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the

area next to the vehicle in the speed range from
approx. 45 mph/70 km/h to ap‐
prox. 130 mph/210 km/h.
The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
For instance, when another vehicle is detected
next to the vehicle and there is a risk of collision
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the colli‐
sion via steering intervention. Intelligent Safety
Safety information Radar sensors

Warning
propriate.
193
CONTROLS Safety
Switching on/off
The side collision mitigation activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was switched
on at the end of the last trip.

Front bumper. Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
Rear bumper. are activated.
sensors clean and unobstructed. Press the button repeatedly.
Camera tween:
subfunctions.

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. All Intelligent Safety systems are
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror switched off.
clean and clear.
194
Safety CONTROLS
Button Status System limits

Safety information
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐

Warning
or currently unavailable. The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
Button does not light up: all Intelligent tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
Safety systems are switched off. spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
Warning function warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
Light in the exterior mirror
lowing situations:
much faster than your own.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
If there is a risk of collision for instance by stickers.
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐ ▷ After improperly performed work on the vehi‐
rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐ cle paint.
brates.
If necessary, an active steering intervention then
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
takes place to prevent collisions and maintain the
vehicle within its own lane.
such as in construction areas.
The steering intervention can be noticed on the
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
steering wheel and can be manually overridden
dirt or water.
at any time.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
terior mirror.
195
CONTROLS Safety
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ Safety information

temperatures.
Warning
via the Start/Stop button. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐ propriate.
even cause them to fail.
A Check Control message is displayed when the Warning
system is not fully functional.
Rear collision preparation to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
Concept use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
The system reacts to vehicles approaching from style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
behind. and actively intervene where appropriate.
General information
Overview
Radar sensors
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor

the area behind the vehicle.
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
The radar sensors are located in the rear
certain speed, the system responds as follows:
bumper.
▷ Active Protection: when a collision seems to
be unavoidable, PreCrash functions are trig‐
gered.
Switching on/off
driving off.
196
Safety CONTROLS
The system is deactivated in the following situa‐ ▷ Front collision mitigation: automatic brake in‐
tions: tervention.
▷ When driving in reverse. ▷ Front collision mitigation: Brake Assistant.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐
System limits tection: Brake Assistant.
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ ▷ Rear collision preparation: detection of immi‐
lowing situations: nent rear collisions.
much faster than your own. Safety information
▷ When the approaching vehicle approaches
slowly. Warning
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, limits, critical situation could not be detected
for instance by stickers. reliably or in time. There is a risk of accident.
▷ If the field of view of the sensors is covered,
e.g., by garage walls, hedges or snow hills.
propriate.
Function
Active Protection When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
Concept ened once after driving away.
Active Protection prepares occupants and the In accident-critical situations, the following indi‐
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or vidual functions become active as needed:
collision situations. ▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety
belts.
General information ▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow
Active Protection consists of various PreCrash gap.
functions, which can vary depending on the ▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof, in‐
equipment. cluding sun protection.
The system is used to detect certain critical driv‐ ▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats in
ing situations that might lead to an accident. This the front: automatic positioning of the back‐
includes the following critical driving situations: rest for the front passenger seat.
▷ Emergency stop. After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
▷ Severe understeering. dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.
▷ Severe oversteering. If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
Certain functions of several systems can, within stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐
the system limits, lead to Active Protection trig‐ ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
gering: safety belt before continuing on your trip.
197
CONTROLS Safety
All other systems can be restored to the desired Safety information

setting.
Warning
PostCrash – iBrake The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's
physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or
Concept
fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
In the event of an accident, the system can bring in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐ that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
vention by the driver in certain situations. This style to traffic conditions.
can reduce the risk of a further collision and the
consequences thereof.
Function
At standstill The system is switched on each time drive-ready
After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐ state is switched on.
matically. After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐
Harder vehicle braking creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.
In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring This procedure takes the following criteria into
the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake account:
Assistant allows.
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. behavior.
For a brief period, the braking pressure will be
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of
higher than the braking pressure that is achieved
trip.
by the automatic braking function. This interrupts
automatic braking. Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system
is active and can also display a recommendation
to take a break.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
Break recommendation
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐
sive maneuver.
Switching on/off, adjusting
Interrupt automatic braking:
The fatigue alert is active automatically with each
▷ By pressing the brake pedal. switching on of drive-ready state and can thus
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal. display a break recommendation.
The break recommendation can also be
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
Fatigue alert Via iDrive:
Concept 1. "My Vehicle"
The system can detect decreasing alertness or 2. "Vehicle settings"

fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous 3. "Driver attention control"
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it 4. Select the desired setting:
is recommended that the driver takes a break.
198
Safety CONTROLS
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is made.

▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is
made with a defined value.
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is
issued earlier.
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
During the display, various settings can be se‐
lected.
After a break, another recommendation to take a
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no
warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
199
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and Adaptive brake assistant
options In combination with Active Cruise Control ACC,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐
tions.
Drive-off assistant
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Concept
served. This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
Driving off
Anti-lock Braking System
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
ABS 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, which increases Depending on the vehicle loading or when a
the active safety. trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Brake assistant
Concept
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically boosts the vehicle braking capabil‐ Within the physical limits, the system helps to
ity to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
braking distance to a minimum during an emer‐ engine speed and by braking the individual
gency stop. This system utilizes all of the capa‐ wheels.
bilities provided by the Antilock Brake System
ABS. General information
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
for the duration of the emergency stop. ditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
200
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Safety information Deactivating/activating DSC
Warning
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
curves.
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust as soon as possible.
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Deactivating DSC
ate. Hold the button down until DSC OFF is
displayed in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance with Activating DSC
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk Press the button.
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of light go out.
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load. Display
In the instrument cluster

Overview When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls

the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DSC OFF
201
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
DTC Dynamic Traction Activating/deactivating DTC

Control Activating DTC
Press the button.
Concept
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
Control where forward momentum is optimized. lights up.
The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐
cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐
stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ Deactivating DTC
what limited driving stability. Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
General information light go out.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Display
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
the following situations:
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow- the instrument cluster.
covered roads.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose Indicator/warning lights
ground.
The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐
▷ When driving with snow chains. vated.
Overview
Automatic program change
Button in the vehicle The system automatically switches to "DSC ON"
in the following situations:
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion ACC is activated.
▷ On a braking intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive
DSC OFF
Concept
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐
cle. The interaction of xDrive and DSC Dynamic
Stability Control further optimizes traction and
driving dynamics. xDrive variably distributes the
202
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
driving forces to the front and rear axles as de‐

manded by the driving situation and road surface.
203
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Driver assistance systems

Vehicle features and closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
options
Warning
It also describes features that are not necessarily The use of the system can lead to an increased
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the risk of accidents in the following situations,
selected options or country versions. This also for instance:
applies to safety-related functions and systems. ▷ On winding roads.
When using these functions and systems, the ▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
served.
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
Cruise control age to property. Only use the system if driving
at constant speed is possible.
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐ Warning
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
system accelerates and brakes automatically as or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
needed. dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
General information
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain condi‐ Overview
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
pending on the driving mode. Buttons on the steering wheel
Safety information Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to

Warning page 205.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 205.
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ Continue cruise control with the last
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust setting, refer to page 206.
204
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Button Function Setting the speed

Store speed, refer to page 205.
Maintaining and storing the speed
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 205.
Switching cruise control on/off
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
the system is interrupted.
up and the marking on the speedometer is set to
the current speed. When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
speed.
maintained and stored as desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed, refer to
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
page 206, in the speedometer and, if necessary,
necessary.
briefly in the instrument cluster.
Switching off
necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted. Press the button.
Pausing cruise control

Changing the speed
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ Steptronic transmission: when selector lever Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
position D is disengaged. until the desired speed is set.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. is clear.
205
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the Displays in the instrument
resistance point, the desired speed increases cluster
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past Display in the speedometer
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive, the marking indicates the
The maximum adjustable speed depends on desired speed.
the vehicle and the set hybrid system charac‐
teristic, refer to page 123. ▷ Orange/white marking: system
is interrupted, the marking in‐
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance dicates the stored speed.
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on ▷ No marking: system is switched off.
the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐ Indicator light
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the ▷ Indicator light green: system is active.
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. ▷ Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
Continuing cruise control ▷ No indicator light: system is switched off.
An interrupted cruise control can be continued

by calling up the stored speed. Status display
Make sure that the difference between current The selected desired speed is hidden af‐
speed and stored speed is not too large before ter a brief time.
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Press the button with the system inter‐
rupted. Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
ues. The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off. System limits
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
grades.
206
Active Cruise Control with closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Stop & Go function ACC
Concept Warning
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
the buttons on the steering wheel. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
The system maintains the desired speed on ing.
clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
automatically. against rolling away, follow the following:
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system ▷ Set the parking brake.
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The turn the front wheels in the direction of the
speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐ curb.
lows.
General information wheel chock.
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper and
a camera on the interior mirror to detect vehicles
driving ahead of you. Warning
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
control settings may change under certain condi‐ or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐ dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
pending on the driving mode. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
The distance can be adjusted in several steps. tervene where appropriate.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and Warning
then proceeds to drive again within a brief period, Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐
the system is able to detect this within the given ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐
system limits. ing situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
Safety information vehicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
Warning ▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the where appropriate.
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
207
Overview Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐

structed.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Camera
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to

page 208.
Store/maintain speed, refer to

page 209.
Pause cruise control, refer to

page 209.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 210. The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
tant: clean and clear.
Increase the distance, refer to
page 210. Area of application
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ The system is best used on well-constructed
tant: roads. The system is functional at speeds begin‐
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Reduce distance, refer to page 210.
The maximum adjustable speed for driving with a
With steering and traffic jam assistant: combustion engine is limited and, e.g., depend‐
Adjust distance, refer to page 210. ent on the vehicle and the vehicle equipment
version.
Rocker switch:
Higher speeds can be selected when driving with
Set speed, refer to page 209.
the combustion engine if the system is switched
With steering and traffic jam assistant: to cruise control without distance control.
Steering and traffic jam assistant on/ The system can also be activated when station‐
off, refer to page 214. ary.
Radar sensor Switching on/off and interrupting

cruise control
Switching on
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light

up and the marking on the speedometer is set to
the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
The radar sensor is located in the front bumper. maintained and stored as desired speed.
208
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if Setting the speed

necessary.
Maintaining and storing the speed
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step on
brake pedal at the same time.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is

deleted.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
When active, press the button on the
the system is interrupted.
steering wheel.
When the system is switched on, the current
If interrupting the system while stationary, press
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
on the brake pedal at the same time.
speed.
Interrupting automatically The stored speed is displayed, refer to

page 211, in the speedometer and, if necessary,
The system is automatically interrupted in the
briefly in the instrument cluster.
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
necessary.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or ton.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
Press the button.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still. Changing the speed
▷ If the system has not detected objects for an
extended period, for instance on a road with
very little traffic without curb or shoulder
markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired,
for instance by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐
hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐
tem.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the

vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
209
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the With steering and traffic jam
resistance point, the desired speed increases assistant: adjusting distance
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Press the button repeatedly until the
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past desired distance is set.
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the Continuing cruise control
action. An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Adjusting the distance Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
Safety information calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
Warning Press the button with the system inter‐
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the rupted.
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk ues.
of accident or risk of damage to property. Be
aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust In the following cases, the stored speed value is
the distance to the traffic and weather condi‐ deleted and cannot be called up again:
tions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐ ▷ When the system is switched off.
tance, possibly by braking. ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Changing between cruise control

Without steering and traffic jam
assistant: reducing distance with/without distance control
Press the button repeatedly until the Safety information
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance, Warning

refer to page 211. The system does not react to traffic driving
ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored
Without steering and traffic jam speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk
assistant: increasing distance of damage to property. Adjust the desired
Press the button repeatedly until the speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
desired distance is set. needed.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance,

refer to page 211. Changing to cruise control without
distance control
Distance control can be switched off and on
when driving with cruise control activated.
210
With steering and traffic jam assistant: Symbol Description

press and hold this button.
Distance 1
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant:
Press and hold this button. Distance 2
In order to switch back to Cruise control with dis‐

tance control, press the button again.
After switching, a Check Control message is dis‐
played. Distance 3

cluster
Display in the speedometer Distance 4

▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ This value is set automatically
tive, the marking indicates the after the system is switched on.
desired speed.
▷ Orange/white marking: system
is interrupted, the marking in‐ System interrupted.
dicates the stored speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Status display No distance control display, as

The selected desired speed is hidden af‐ the accelerator pedal is being
ter a brief time. pressed.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is Detected vehicle
shown.
Symbol Description
Green symbol:
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you. The system main‐
tains the set distance to the ve‐
hicle in front.
211
As soon as the detected vehicle drives off, the ▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected, refer
vehicle symbol in the distance indicator will move to page 158.
away. ▷ Distance too short.
To accelerate, activate ACC, for instance by ▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.
briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal or
pressing the rocker switch.
System limits
Detection range
Symbol Description
Vehicle symbol flashes:

The conditions are not adequate
for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but
applies the brakes until you ac‐
tively resume control by press‐
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐
erator pedal. The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐
tance bars flash red and an Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be
acoustic signal sounds: detected.
Brake and make an evasive ma‐
neuver, if necessary. Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the following
Displays in the Head-up Display situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road
Desired speed users.
Some system information can also be displayed ▷ For red traffic lights.
in the Head-up Display. ▷ For cross traffic.
The symbol is displayed when the set ▷ For oncoming traffic.
desired speed is reached.
Distance information
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is
too short.
The distance information is active in the follow‐

ing situations:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
212
Swerving vehicles
When you approach a curve the system may

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you
until it is completely within the same lane as your may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After
vehicle. releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly activated and controls speed independently.
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐ Driving off
lected distance in certain situations, including if In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles automatically; for example:
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly ▷ On steep uphill grades.
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
▷ In front of bumps in the road.
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system re‐
quests that the driver intervene by braking and In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
Cornering
orable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
When the desired speed is too high for a curve,
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves ▷ Fog.
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a ▷ Glare.
curve at an appropriate speed. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐ situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle stance by braking, steering or evading.
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐
tected very late.
213
Engine power General information

The desired speed is also maintained downhill. The system determines the position of the lane
The speed may not be maintained on uphill markings and the vehicle driving ahead using five
grades if the engine power is insufficient. radar sensors and a camera.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may in‐ Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
tentionally exceed or drop below the set desired self according to the lane markings or vehicles in
speed in some situations, for instance on down‐ front.
hill or uphill grades. Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Malfunction
Safety information
Radar sensor
The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐
Warning
sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused
by damage incurred, for instance during parking. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐
tem fails.
Have the system checked by a dealer's service fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
center or another qualified service center or re‐ driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
pair shop. closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
The system may be impaired when the detection ate.
range of the radar sensor is partially covered
such as by the license plate holder.
Overview
Camera
The function for detecting and responding when Button on the steering wheel
approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in
the following situations: Button Function
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Steering and traffic jam assistant on/
after vehicle delivery. off, refer to page 215.
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Check Control message is displayed. Radar sensors
Steering and traffic jam

assistant
Concept
The system assists the driver in keeping the ve‐
hicle within the lane. For this purpose, the sys‐
tem executes supporting steering movements,
for instance when driving in a curve.
214
Camera
Front center bumper.

clean and clear.
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐
Front side bumper. ing on both sides is detected.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking
on both sides or a vehicle driving ahead is de‐
tected.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Wide curves.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
▷ Turn signal switched off.
▷ The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar Switching on/off
Switching on
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.

The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all

function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 215.
215
Steering wheel symbol lights up green. Displays in the instrument

The system is active. cluster
With the system switched on, the person warn‐
Symbol Description
ing with City braking function and the side colli‐
sion mitigation are active. Gray steering wheel symbol:
The system is on standby.
Switching off
Green steering wheel symbol:
The system is activated.
The indicator goes out. Yellow steering wheel symbol
The system does not perform supportive steer‐ and a signal sounds, if applica‐
ing wheel movements. ble:
System interruption is imminent.
Interrupting automatically
Green steering wheel symbol
The system is automatically interrupted in the and lane marking symbol:
The system supports the driver
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h. in keeping the vehicle within the
▷ When the steering wheel is released. lane.
▷ When you manipulate steering. Green steering wheel symbol,
▷ When leaving own lane. gray lane marking symbol:
▷ When the turn signal is switched on. No lane marking detected, the
▷ When the lane is too narrow. vehicle follows the vehicle
ahead.
▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is de‐
tected and there is no vehicle driving in front. The limits of steering support
when cornering may have been
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray. reached.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all

function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 215.
216
Symbol Description ▷ Speed between approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h

and approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h.
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
The hands are not grasping the Changing lanes
steering wheel. The system is 1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits
still active. changing lanes.
2. Press the turn indicator lever, refer to
Red steering wheel symbol and
page 129, in the required direction to the
a signal sounds:
pressure point for signaling briefly.
The hands are not grasping the
Steering support in the required direction can
steering wheel. System interrup‐
be detected a short time later.
tion is imminent.
The system does not perform
supportive steering wheel move‐
ments.
With Active Cruise Control, the
system may reduce the speed.
Displays in the Head-up Display

All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display. After the lane change, the system helps keep the
vehicle in the new lane.
Lane change assistant
Canceling a lane change
Concept The lane change can be canceled by steering
The system additionally supports the driver when into the opposite direction.
changing lanes on multilane roads.
System limits
▷ The functional requirements of the steering General information
and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled, refer to The system cannot be activated or meaningfully
page 215. used in certain situations.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐
clists and with physical barriers to oncoming Safety information
traffic, such as crash barriers.
▷ Lane markings have been detected. Warning
▷ Sensor system of the system is active and a The system is designed to operate in certain
vehicle approaching from the rear can be de‐ conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tected. tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
▷ Blind spot collision warning and steering in‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
tervention are switched on, refer to page 189. of damage to property. Actively intervene as
217

PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
Hands on the steering wheel PDC is a support when parking. Objects that you
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel are approaching slowly in front of or behind the
contact in the following situations: vehicle are indicated by signal tones and a dis‐
▷ Driving with gloves. play on the Control Display.
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel. With Parking Assistant: obstacles on the side of
the vehicle that are detected by the sensors of
Narrow lanes the parking assistant, may also be reported by
the side protection function, refer to page 221.
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐
stance in the following situations:
General information
The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐
▷ In construction areas.
ments are located in the bumpers and possibly
▷ In rescue lanes. on the sides of the vehicle.
▷ Within city limits. The range, depending on the obstacle and envi‐
ronmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
Weather
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐ pending collision at a distance to the object of
orable weather or light conditions: approx. 27 in/70 cm.
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐ For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
ings. warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐ Safety information
tions:
▷ Wet conditions. Warning
▷ Snowfall. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
▷ Slush. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare. fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
stance by braking, steering or evading. ate.
218
Switching on/off
Warning
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance Switching on automatically
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐ The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a lowing situations:
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
the engine is running.
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
is not yet active. ▷ While approaching detected obstacles if the
speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
The activation distance depends on the situa‐
Overview tion in question.
You may switch automatic activation when ob‐
Button in the vehicle stacles are detected on and off.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on
the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
Park assistance button rently used.
Depending on equipment, an additional camera
view is also switched on.
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, Automatic deactivation during
for instance in the bumpers. forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Ensure full functionality:
Press the park assistance button.
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers, bicycle racks.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
219
Warning Visual warning
Signal tones
General information
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is
detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal
tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals. The approach of the vehicle to an object is
When the distance to a detected object is less shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone farther away are already displayed on the Control
is sounded. Display before a signal sounds.
When there are objects in front of and behind the The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.
vehicle at the same time, with a distance smaller
The range of the sensors is represented in the
than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternating constant
colors green, yellow and red.
tone will sound.
Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation
Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone
of the required space.
and constant tone are switched off if the selector
lever position P is engaged. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
The intermittent tone is switched off after a short
different view with obstacle markings as needed:
time when the vehicle is stationary.
"Rear view camera"
Volume Cross traffic warning, refer to page 237: de‐
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the pending on the equipment, it is warned in the
entertainment volume can be adjusted. PDC display against vehicles approaching in the
front or rear from the side.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" With parking assistant and
2. "iDrive settings" Steptronic transmission:
3. "Tone" emergency braking function,
4. "Volume settings" Active PDC
5. "PDC"
Concept
The emergency braking function of PDC initiates
an emergency braking in case of acute risk of
rently used.
collision.
General information
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐
vented under all circumstances.
220
The function is available below walking speed With Parking Assistant: side
when driving in reverse or rolling backward. protection
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the
braking intervention. Concept
After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐ The system warns of obstacles on the side of
ing toward an obstacle is possible. Proceed with the vehicle.
caution. To move forward, lightly press the accel‐
erator pedal and release as needed. General information
If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed, the The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC
vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking is pos‐ and parking assistant.
sible at any time.
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC Display
and parking assistant.
Safety information
Warning
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
tively intervene where appropriate. markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐
cle.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
Adjusting stacles.
The system can be activated or deactivated.
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
Via iDrive: were detected.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the
vehicle was not yet captured.
3. "Parking"
4. "Active PDC with braking interv."
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ passing them.
rently used.
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the
markings are shown in black after a certain time.
The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐
tured.
221
System limits ▷ With small and low objects, for instance

boxes.
Safety information ▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
Warning ▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ ▷ With plants and bushes.
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk curbs, can move into the blind area of the
of damage to property. Actively intervene as sensors before or after a continuous tone
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ sounds.
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
tem’s operation and limitations. the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement

False warnings
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the
lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐
cle within the detection range:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
coats.
ice.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines. ▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
or out of position. ▷ In large buildings with right angles and
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐ rages.
fall, extreme heat, or strong wind. ▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other ▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
vehicles. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. sweeping machines, high pressure steam
▷ With moving objects. cleaners or neon lights.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic
ledges. PDC activation on obstacle detection, refer to
page 219, for instance in automatic vehicle
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
washes.
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
Malfunction
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
222
White symbol is displayed, and the range Park assistance button

of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
Camera
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Without Surround View:

rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in The camera lens is located in the handle of the
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area trunk lid.
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐ The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
play. necessary, clean the camera lens.
Additionally, assistance functions can be shown
in the display, e.g., help lines.
Switching on/off
Safety information
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
Warning tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the is running.
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Automatic deactivation during
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch forward travel
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
The system switches off when a certain driving
tively intervene where appropriate.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle
Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off
equipment: button in the vehicle manually

The parking assistance functions are shown on
223
Switching the view via iDrive Parking aid lines

If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive: Pathway lines
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.

2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or roof rack systems
can limit the detection range of the camera. Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
quired when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
Display on the Control Display
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
General information are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
The assistance functions can be manually acti‐
vated.
Via iDrive: Turning radius lines
▷ "Parking aid lines".

Pathway lines and turning radius lines are dis‐
played, refer to page 224.
▷ "Obstacle marking".
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the ob‐
stacles detected by PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol are displayed, refer to page 225, by
markings.
More than one assistance function can be active Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
at the same time. on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius

lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
224
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
the green pathway line covers the corre‐ sistance functions also consider data from the
sponding turning radius line. PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
Obstacle marking trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
With Parking Assistant

Plus: Surround View
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles

Concept
behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park The system provides assistance in parking and
Distance Control sensors. maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
General information
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Several cameras capture the area from different
Control. selectable perspectives.
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐
played:
Setting brightness and contrast
▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
via iDrive page 227: the system shows the camera
With the rearview camera switched on: perspective suitable for the respective driving
situation.
2. ▷ ▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 227: for rep‐
"Brightness"
resenting the areas behind the vehicle.
▷ "Contrast"
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view, refer to
3. Set the desired value. page 229: for representing the areas on the
sides of the vehicle.
System limits ▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive, refer
to page 227.
Deactivated camera
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 230: to
When the camera is deactivated, for instance present cross traffic, for instance at junctions
when the trunk lid is open, the camera image is and driveways, depending on the currently
displayed hatched in gray. engaged gear.
Depending on the view, the environment around
Detection of objects
the vehicle or a part of it is depicted.
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
In addition, assistance functions, for instance
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
guidelines, can be faded into the display.
the system.
225
More than one assistance function can be active Cameras

at the same time.
Some assistance functions can be manually acti‐
vated.
The following assistance functions are automati‐
cally displayed:
▷ Side protection, refer to page 229.
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 229.
Safety information
Front camera
Warning
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Overview Rearview camera
One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐

terior mirror housing.
Park assistance button
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on the
Panorama View camera lenses. If required, clean the camera
lenses.
Switching on/off
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
is running. See Park Distance Control, PDC.
226
The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐ ▷ "Parking Assistant", refer to page 232.
tive driving situation is displayed. ▷ "Brightness", refer to page 231.
▷ "Contrast", refer to page 231.
▷ "Parking aid lines", refer to page 228.
▷ "Obstacle marking", refer to page 228.
▷ "Car wash", refer to page 229.
▷ "Settings": apply settings, for instance to
use the activation points for Panorama View.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Selection window
The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
Automatic deactivation during
lected in the selection window via iDrive.
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving Side view
The side view can be selected for the right or left
Switch the system back on, if needed. vehicle side.
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at
Display on the Control Display the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
displaying the side surroundings.
Overview
The side view looks from rear to front and in case
of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐
stacles.
Automatic camera perspective

The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐
ing direction.
This perspective adapts to the respective driving
situation.
1 Function bar
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
2 Selection window
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or
3 Side view at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary,
4 Automatic camera perspective changes to a side view.
5 Movable camera perspective When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is closed and the system
6 Camera image
uses a fixed perspective of the rearview camera.
7 Rearview camera If necessary, manually select the automatic cam‐
era perspective when reverse gear is engaged.
Function bar The automatic camera perspective will be re‐
tained for the current parking maneuver.
Assistance functions can be activated and set‐
tings can be entered via the function bar via
iDrive.
227
Movable camera perspective Turning radius lines

With selection of the movable camera perspec‐
tive, a circle appears on the Control Display.
By turning the Controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
lected.
The current perspective is marked with a camera
symbol.
With BMW Gesture Control: the movable camera
perspective can be moved around the circle us‐
ing BMW Gesture Control, refer to page 47. Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
To leave the circle, move the Controller sideways lines.
and press or tap the active camera symbol via
the touchscreen. Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Rearview camera Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐
era.
Parking using pathway and turning radius
Parking aid lines lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐
Pathway lines dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐

quired when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the
PDC Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera
image.
228
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings Limits of side protection

match the markings of the PDC Park Distance The system only displays stationary obstacles
Control. that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
Vehicle wash view The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the
markings are not shown anymore in the display
after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle
must be newly captured.
Door opening angle
Concept
If obstacle marking is activated, the system indi‐
cates fixed obstacles that obstruct the opening
The vehicle wash view assists when entering a
angles of the doors.
vehicle wash by displaying the floor and the vehi‐
cle's own track. The system does not provide a warning of ap‐
proaching traffic.
Side protection
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
Display
Steptronic transmission: the maximum opening

angles of the doors are displayed in selector
lever position P.
As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the open‐

ing angles are replaced by parking aid lines.
Limits of the display

To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle The vehicle surroundings are displayed with dis‐
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐ torted image for technical reasons.
cle. Even if the symbols for the door opening angles
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected. do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐ play, the following needs to be noted when park‐
stacles. ing next to other objects:
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
Control Display.
229
Panorama View With navigation system: activation

points
Concept
Concept
Positions where Panorama View should switch
on automatically can be stored as activation
points provided that a GPS signal is received.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐
ward for the front camera.
The system provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Storing activation points
1. Drive to the position at which the system is to
General information be switched on, and stop.
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left

and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐
atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in 3. Move the Controller to the left.
the front and rear capture the sideways traffic 4. "Add activation point"
area to improve the view. The current position is displayed.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front 5. "Add activation point"
and rear end of the vehicle.
Activation points are, if possible, stored with
The camera image shows different levels of dis‐ town/city and street address, or else with the
tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for GPS coordinates.
distance estimations.
Using activation points
Display on the Control Display The use of activation points can be switched on
Press the button when the engine is run‐ and off.
ning.
Depending on the driving direction, the image of
the respective camera is displayed: 2. Move the Controller to the left.
▷ "front": front camera image. 3. "Settings"
▷ "rear": rear camera image. 4. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross traf‐ 5. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
fic warning, refer to page 237, can additionally
warn of approaching vehicles using radar sen‐ Displaying activation points
sors.
3. "Show activation points"
230
A list of all activation points is displayed. Detection of objects

Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
Renaming or deleting activation points objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Some assistance functions also consider data
2. Move the Controller to the left. from the PDC Park Distance Control.
3. "Show activation points" Follow, refer to page 218, the notes in the PDC
A list of all activation points is displayed. Park Distance Control chapter.
4. Select an activation point as needed. The objects displayed on the Control Display
5. ▷ "Rename" may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
▷ "Delete this activation point"
▷ "Delete all activation points"
Malfunction
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control
Setting brightness and contrast
Display.
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
Surround View or Panorama View switched on. A yellow symbol is displayed and the re‐
cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐
Via iDrive:
era is displayed in black on the Control
1. Move the Controller to the left. Display.
2. ▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
With Parking Assistant
Plus: Remote 3D View
The system can be used only to a limited extent Concept
in the following situations: With the proper equipment, the BMW Con‐
▷ In poor light. nected App and the camera images from Sur‐
▷ In case of soiled cameras. round View can be used to display the vehicle
surroundings on a mobile device such as a
▷ With a door open. smartphone.
▷ With the trunk lid open. The function displays a momentary view of the
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. situation.
Gray hatched areas with symbol, for instance
open door, in the camera image mark areas that Functional requirements
are currently not displayed. ▷ Data transmission must be activated, refer to
page 58.
System limits ▷ BMW Connected App must be installed on
the mobile device.
Non-visible areas
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
231
Switching the function on/off The system supports parking in the following sit‐
uations:
Via iDrive:
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel
1. With the standby state switched on: "My parking.
Vehicle"
▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the road,
2. "iDrive settings" diagonal parking. The system orients itself
3. "Data privacy" with the middle of the parking space during
4. "Remote 3D View" diagonal parking.
Functional limitations General information

The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
Handling
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
▷ In poor light.
steps:
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ With a door or the trunk lid open. Dark fields
▷ Parking space search.
in the display indicate areas that are not re‐
corded by the system. ▷ Parking.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
▷ When other camera functions are being per‐
formed in the vehicle. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking
speed.
Steptronic transmission
▷ It may not be possible to use the function in
every country. The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and takes control of the following
▷ For reasons of data protection, the function functions during the parking procedure:
can only be used three times within two
hours. ▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing the gears.
Parking Assistant Press and hold the park assistance button for the
duration of the parking procedure.
Concept Parking is automatic.
Safety information
Warning
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
232
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic spaces are measured and the distances to ob‐
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ stacles determined.
ate.
NOTICE
Ultrasound sensors
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over
Ensure full functionality:
or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to
property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
tervene where appropriate. ers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
The safety information of the PDC Park Distance
Control, refer to page 218, applies in addition. For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx.
Overview 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles:
Button in the vehicle 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space

General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
Park assistance button ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your
vehicle's length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Ultrasound sensors Diagonal parking:
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐
mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.
For parking
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
▷ Doors and trunk lid are closed.
and the ultrasound sensors of PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control in the bumpers, the parking ▷ The parking brake is released.
233
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the driv‐ Parking space search and system
er's side, the corresponding turn signal must status
be switched on.
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button

The LED lights up.
▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking
The current status of the parking space search is assistant is activated and the parking space
indicated on the Control Display. search is active.
Parking assistant is activated automatically. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐
Switching on with reverse gear hicle symbol. When the parking assistant is
active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
1. Shift into reverse. lighted in color and a signal sounds. Switch
The current status of the parking space signal tone on/off, refer to page 235.
search is indicated on the Control Display. ▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly
2. To activate: "Parking Assistant" detected, the system automatically adjusts
the suitable parking method. In the case of
Display on the Control Display parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐
nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In
System activated/deactivated this case, the desired parking method must
be selected manually.
Sym‐ Meaning ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
bol tive. The system takes over
the steering.
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐
The system is activated. ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and
straight, even if the system is deactivated.
When the system is deactivated, the displays
on the Control Display are shown in gray.
234
Signal tones The end of the parking procedure is indicated

on the Control Display.
Switching signal tone for suitable 5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
parking spaces on/off needed.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
2. "Vehicle settings" time:
3. "Parking" ▷ Steptronic transmission: release the
4. "Parking Assistant" park assistance button during the park‐
5. "Sound if parking space detected" ing procedure.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ ▷ "Parking Assistant": select the symbol on
rently used. the Control Display.
Parking using the parking Interrupting automatically

assistant The system is interrupted automatically in the
Parking ▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐
tant. ▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
Engage the reverse gear and activate the
system or press the parking assistance but‐ ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
ton, refer to page 234, on the Control Display. overcome, such as curbs.
Parking assistant is activated. ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐
pear.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of
up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a dis‐ ▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
tance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. clearances that are too small.
The status of the parking space search and ▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐
possible parking spaces are displayed on the tempts or the time taken for parking is ex‐
Control Display, refer to page 234. ceeded.
3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the ▷ When switching to another function on the
parking procedure: switch on the turn signal Control Display.
on the corresponding side. Steptronic transmission:
The system takes over the steering. ▷ When the park assistance button is released.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ ▷ If the trunk lid is open.
play. ▷ If doors are open.
Steptronic transmission: ▷ When setting the parking brake.
Press and hold the park assistance button for ▷ During acceleration.
the duration of the parking procedure. At the
end of the parking procedure, the P selector ▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an
lever position is set. extended period while the vehicle is station‐
ary.
235
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
Resuming ▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐ parking space.
ued, if needed. ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to of a port.
page 234, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display. Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐
Switching off urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the
The system can be switched off manually: following situations:
Press the park assistance button. ▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
System limits ▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
Safety information machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
Warning or out of position.
The system is designed to operate in certain ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ fall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
of damage to property. Actively intervene as vehicles.
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
No parking assistance ▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
The parking assistant does not offer assistance smooth surfaces.
in the following situations: ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
▷ In tight curves. such as fences.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
Functional limitations boxes.
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ ▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
lowing situations: the lane.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel ▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
roads. foam material.
▷ On slippery ground. ▷ With plants and bushes.
236
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance Two additional radar sensors are located in the
curbs, can move into the blind area of the front bumpers.
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Safety information
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
Warning
system.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐
tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐
tected at all.
Malfunction propriate.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer's service center or another Overview
Cross traffic warning

Concept
At blind driveways or when driving out of diago‐
nal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic is
detected sooner by the system than is possible
from the driver's seat.
General information Park assistance button
Radar sensors
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor

the area behind the vehicle.
The system indicates approaching traffic.
The radar sensors are located in the rear
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic bumper.
area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well.
237
▷ With the steering and traffic jam assistant ac‐

tive: when a certain driving distance is ex‐
ceeded.
▷ With an active parking operation of the park‐
ing assistant.
Warning
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, two addi‐
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
tional radar sensors are located in the front
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the
bumpers.
light in the exterior mirror may flash.
sensors clean and unobstructed. Light in the exterior mirror
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
1. Press the park assistance button.

3. "Settings"
4. "Cross traffic alert"
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles
5. "Activate function" are detected by the rear sensors and your own
vehicle is moving backwards.
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐
Display in the PDC Park Distance
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is
Control view
active and a gear is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
engaged.
Switching off automatically

The system is automatically switched off in the
In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐
spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed. are detected by the sensors.
238
Display in the camera view
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the

camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected
by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐
spective direction.
System limits
lowing situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is very
high.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If the field of view of the sensors is covered,
e.g., by garage walls, hedges or snow hills.
▷ When crossing objects move at a very slow
speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the
sensors, that hide cross traffic.
239
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and Driving mode Damper tuning
options COMFORT Balanced out.
ECO PRO Balanced out.

cific and optional features offered with the series. SPORT Taut.
served.
Chassis components
The chassis components are optimized for the
vehicle and its scope of application and thereby
ensure the best possible Driving Dynamics.
Adaptive chassis
Concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion
when using a dynamic driving style or traveling
on uneven road surfaces.
General information
The driving dynamics and driving comfort are en‐
hanced depending on the road surface condition
and driving style.
Tuning
The system offers several different damping set‐
tings.
The damping settings are assigned to the differ‐
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol, refer to page 138.
240
Climate control CONTROLS
Climate control
Vehicle features and Automatic climate control
options
Overview
cific and optional features offered with the series. Buttons in the vehicle
served.
Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the Climate control functions
following components:
Button Function
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Microfilter. Temperature, refer to page 242.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.
Depending on the equipment specification:
▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter. Climate control operation, refer
▷ Ionization. to page 242.
▷ Fragrancing. Maximum cooling, refer to
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC. page 243.
▷ Parked-car ventilation. AUTO program, refer to
page 243.
Recirculated-air mode, refer to

page 244.
Air flow, manual, refer to

page 244.
Intensity AUTO program.
Air distribution, manual, refer to

page 244.
241
CONTROLS Climate control
Button Function Switching off

When equipped with automatic climate control
SYNC program, refer to
with enhanced features:
page 245.
▷ Complete system:
Defrost and defog window, refer
Press and hold the left button on the
to page 245.
driver's side until the system
Rear window defroster, refer to switches off.
page 245. ▷ On the front passenger side:
Active seat ventilation, refer to Press and hold the left button on the
page 113. front passenger side.
Seat heating, refer to page 112.

Temperature
Opening the Climate menu, re‐ Concept
fer to page 242.
The automatic climate control achieves the set
For the following settings, for in‐ temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
stance: upper body temperature using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
adjustment, parked-car ventila‐ and then keeps it constant.
tion.
Adjusting
Opening the Climate menu Turn the wheel to set the desired
Press the button. temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between dif‐
The Climate menu is displayed. ferent temperature settings. Oth‐
All the climate control functions which can ad‐ erwise, the automatic climate
justed via iDrive can be called up via the Climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
menu, e.g., upper body temperature adjustment, set temperature.
parked-car ventilation.
Air conditioning
Switching on/off
Concept
Switching on The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐
Press any button except for the following: humidified and, depending on the temperature
▷ Rear window defroster. setting, warmed again.
▷ Left side of air flow button. Cooling of the car's interior is possible with the
A/C button with drive-ready state switched on.
▷ SYNC program.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching on/off
▷ Seat ventilation.
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
242
Air conditioning is switched on with the engine Switching on/off

running.
Press the button.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
the side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
program switched on.
ready state is switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐
cally with the AUTO program.
ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side
When using the automatic climate control, con‐ windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle. The air conditioning, refer to page 242, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
Maximum cooling gram.
Point the side vents toward the side windows.
Concept At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐ trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the densation as much as possible.
drive-ready state switched on. The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
General information
The function is available with external tempera‐ Intensity
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐
drive-ready state switched on. sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic
control for the air flow and air distribution.
Switching on/off
Press the left or right side of the button:
Press the button. to decrease or increase intensity.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on. The selected intensity is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this. Automatic recirculated-air
Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐ control AUC
gram active.
Concept
AUTO program The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
Concept The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats air is recirculated.
the car's interior automatically.
The air distribution and temperature are control‐ General information
led automatically depending on the temperature If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
in the car's interior and the desired temperature tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
setting including the selected intensity of the air automatically.
flow.
243
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐ If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
ously flows into the car's interior. culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐ page 245.
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases. Adjusting the air flow manually
Switching on/off Concept

Via iDrive: The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings" General information
3. "Climate functions" To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
4. If necessary, "Air quality" program first.
5. "Automatic air recirculation"
Operation
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to Press the left or right side of the button:
page 245. to decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of

Recirculated-air mode the automatic climate control.
Concept The air flow of the automatic climate control may

be reduced automatically to save battery power.
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system
Controlling the air distribution
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle. manually
Operation Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
Press the button:
justed manually.
The LED is illuminated when recircu‐
lated-air mode is switched on. The supply of out‐ Operation
side air is shut off.
Press the button repeatedly to select a
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh
program:
air is directed into the vehicle's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐ ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window ▷ Upper body region and floor area.
fogging increases.
▷ Floor area.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air ▷ Windows and floor area.
mode switches off automatically after a certain ▷ Windows: driver's side only.
amount of time, depending on the environmental
conditions. ▷ Windows and upper body.
▷ Upper body region.
244
The selected air distribution is shown on the dis‐ sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the wind‐
play of the automatic climate control. shield.
If there is window condensation, defog the win‐
dows, refer to page 245. Rear window defroster
SYNC program Press the button. The LED lights up.
Concept The function is available with the engine running.

Depending on the equipment, the following set‐ The rear window defroster switches off automat‐
tings of the driver's side can be transferred to the ically after a certain period of time.
front-passenger side and the rear:
▷ Temperature. Microfilter/activated-charcoal
▷ Air flow.
filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the
▷ Air distribution.
incoming air.
▷ AUTO program.
The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐
eous pollutants from the outside air that enters
Switching on/off
the vehicle.
Press the button. Have this combined filter changed during vehicle
The LED is illuminated with the SYNC maintenance, refer to page 341.
The program is switched off automatically if the
settings on the front passenger side or in the Ventilation
rear are changed.
Concept
To defrost windows and remove The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
condensation justed.
Concept Adjusting the ventilation

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows.
General information
The air flow directions can be adjusted for direct
Switching on/off or indirect ventilation.
Open the vents and position them to ensure ef‐
Press the button.
fective climate control.
switched on. Direct ventilation
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the The air flow is directed towards the passengers.
system switched on. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending
on the adjusted temperature.
If there is window condensation, press
the button on the driver's side or switch
on air conditioning to utilize the condensation
245
Indirect ventilation 4. "Temperature adjustment, upper body"

The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐ 5. Set the desired temperature.
gers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled indi‐ ▷ Toward blue: colder.
rectly, depending on the set temperature.
▷ Toward red: warmer.
Front ventilation Ventilation in rear, center

Overview
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐

row 1.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1. ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2. ▷ Thumbwheel for varying the temperature, ar‐
row 3.
Toward blue: colder.
Varying the temperature of the
Toward red: warmer.
ventilation
General information Ventilation in the rear, on the

The temperature of the ventilation in the upper side
body area can be varied.
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g.
colder toward blue, warmer toward red.
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body
region heats or cools noticeably, depending on
the adjusted temperature.
This does not change the set interior tempera‐
ture for the driver and front passenger.
Adjusting ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐

Via iDrive: row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
1. "My Vehicle"
of the vents, arrow 2.
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
246
Rear automatic climate 3. "Climate functions"

4. "Rear climate"
control
The rear automatic climate control is not ready
for operation if the automatic climate control is
Overview switched off or if the function for defrosting the
windows and removing condensation is active.
Using the button: switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating.
Using the button: switching off

Press and hold the left side of the but‐
ton.
Climate control functions

Temperature
Button Function
Concept
Temperature, refer to page 247 The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Maximum cooling, refer to Adjusting

page 247.
Turn the wheel to set the desired
AUTO program, refer to temperature.
page 248. Do not rapidly switch between dif‐
ferent temperature settings. Oth‐
Air flow, manual, refer to
erwise, the automatic climate
page 248.
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
Air distribution, manual, refer to set temperature.
page 248.
Seat heating, refer to page 112. Maximum cooling
Concept
Switching on/off The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
Via iDrive drive-ready state switched on.
1. "My Vehicle"
247

The function is available with external tempera‐ To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the program first.
drive-ready state switched on.
Operation
Switching on/off Press the left or right side of the button:
Press the button. to decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
switched on.
the automatic climate control.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this. Controlling the air distribution
manually
AUTO program
Concept
Concept The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are con‐ justed manually.
trolled automatically.
Operation
Switching on/off Press the button repeatedly to select a
Press the button. program:
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO ▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is ▷ Floor area.
directed to the upper body and into the floor
area.
Ambient air package
Intensity
Concept
With the AUTO program activated, the automatic
The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean
intensity control can be changed:
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐
Press the left or right side of the button: grances.
to decrease or increase intensity. Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐
The selected intensity is shown on the display of pended particles. Together with the selected fra‐
the automatic climate control. grance, ionization contributes to well-being and
relaxation while driving.
Controlling the air flow manually

General information
Concept Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possible
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
by replacing the fragrance cartridges.
manually.
248
The following criteria can influence the percep‐ Fragrancing

tion of scents in the car's interior:
▷ Automatic climate control settings. General information
▷ Temperature and air humidity. Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to avoid
▷ Time of day and season. a habituation effect.
▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants, Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
for instance fatigue. switching between the fragrances.
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
fragrance cartridges. compartment.
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the ve‐
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty, hicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can occur
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge. prior to the trip. The system is automatically
switched on with the parked-car ventilation if fra‐
grancing was switched on at the end of the last
Safety information
trip.
Warning Functional requirements

Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges can ▷ Fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.
cause the emission of harmful substances, mal‐ ▷ Interior temperature between 41 ℉/+5 ℃
functions, and damage to the system. There is and 104 ℉/+40 ℃.
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not refill genuine fragrance cartridges. When a ▷ Open the vents to allow the fragrance to flow
cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fra‐ out.
grance cartridge.
Selecting the fragrance
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
Ionization vehicle.
Via iDrive:
Concept
1. "My Vehicle"
Ionization cleans the car's interior air of sus‐
pended particles. 2. "Vehicle settings"
Switching on/off 4. "Fragrance"
Via iDrive: 5. Select the desired setting.
1. "My Vehicle" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
2. "Vehicle settings" rently used.
Switching fragrancing on/off,
4. If necessary, "Air quality" adjusting intensity
5. "Ionization" Via iDrive:
The climate control display indicates that ioniza‐
1. "My Vehicle"
tion is switched on.
249
3. "Climate functions" 3. Remove the cover of the fragrance cartridge.

4. "Fragrance" Hold the cover on the top to slide it from the
fragrance cartridge.
5. "Level"
Display
The illustrations on the Control Display show the
actual filling level of the fragrance cartridges.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
4. Insert the removed cover on the back side of
3. "Climate functions" the fragrance cartridge.
4. "Fragrance"
The fill level of the current fragrance is dis‐
played.
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated,
the cartridge still contains a fluid carrying the fra‐
grance. However, it is not sufficient for fragranc‐
ing.
When a fragrance cartridge requires replace‐
ment, a Check Control message is displayed 5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the
chip faces away from the cartridge holder.
Inserting fragrance cartridges
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment, refer to

page 266.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
250
6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐ Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐
sure into the cartridge holder. The cartridge grance indicated on the Control Display.
snaps lightly into place.
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the

7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it engages. holder.
Make sure that no objects press against the
cartridge holder from below, otherwise the
function of the ambient air package could be
impacted.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge

The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment, refer to Recycling
page 266.
Empty fragrance cartridges can be taken
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder. to a dealer’s service center or another
The cartridge holder slides down. qualified service center or repair shop for
recycling.
Stationary climate control

Concept
Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's
interior prior to departure to a comfortable tem‐
perature.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder. The system automatically cools, vents, or heats
depending on the internal and external tempera‐
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance
ture. Snow and ice may be removed more easily.
indicated on the Control Display.
General information
The stationary climate control can be switched
on and off directly or via a preset departure time.
251
▷ Switching on/off directly, refer to page 252. Switching on/off directly

▷ Climate control for departure time, refer to
page 253. Concept
The stationary climate control can be switched There are different ways to switch the system on
on with the BMW Connected app, refer to or off.
page 254. The system switches off automatically after a
The air automatically exits through the vents to certain period of time.
the windshield, the side windows, the upper
body region and into the floor area. Using the button
The system switches off automatically after a When the vehicle is in standby state, the system
certain period of time. can be switched on or off via the automatic cli‐
If stationary climate control is used during the mate control buttons.
charging process, less air conditioning capacity The system switches off when the vehicle is ex‐
will be required while driving. This optimizes the ited.
range. Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state. ▷ Seat heating.
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently ▷ Seat ventilation.

charged or the charging cable is connected.
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐
Via iDrive
charged, it can take some time after connect‐ The system can be switched on or off via iDrive.
ing the charging cable, until the stationary cli‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
mate control will be functional.
▷ Direct operation or departure time prese‐
lected: depends on internal, external, and set 3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
desired temperature. 4. "Activate comfort climate"
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time 5. "Activate now"
are set correctly.
▷ To ensure the starting capability of the vehi‐ Via BMW display key
cle, the stationary climate control may be au‐ The system can be switched on or off via the
tomatically switched off, for instance after re‐ BMW display key.
peated switching on or due to an insufficient
state of charge of the high-voltage battery: Switching on
switch the drive-ready state on and off and 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
the system is available again. key.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out. 2. "Departure setting"
3. Tap on the symbol.
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
252
Switching off 6. Select the desired departure time.

1. Switch on the display of the BMW display 7. Set the departure time.
key. 8. Select day of the week, if needed.
2. "Departure setting"
3. Tap on the symbol. Via BMW display key
4. "Stop" 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display

key.
Display 2. "Departure setting"
symbol on the automatic climate control indi‐ 3. Tap on the symbol.
cates the system is switched on. 4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
Climate control for departure
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
time
7. "OK"
Concept
Activating the departure time
Different departure times can be set to ensure a
comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at Functional requirement
the time of departure.
If a departure time is to influence the switching
The activation time is automatically determined on of the stationary climate control, the respec‐
based on the temperature. tive departure time must be activated first.
Departure time with weekday: time and day of
the week can be set. Via iDrive
On the desired weekdays, the system will be 1. "My Vehicle"
switched on promptly before the set departure 2. "Vehicle settings"
time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
4. "Activate comfort climate"
▷ Set departure times.
5. "Plan comfort climate"
▷ Activate departure times.
6. "Precondition for departure"
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between
setting/activating the departure time and the Activate the desired departure time.
planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐
riod of time for the climate control. Via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
Setting the departure time key.
2. "Departure setting"
Via iDrive 3. Tap on the symbol.
1. "My Vehicle" 4. Tap on the symbol.
2. "Vehicle settings" Activate the desired departure time.
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
253
Display
The symbol on the automatic climate control
signals an activated departure time.
symbol on the automatic climate control indi‐
cates the system is switched on.
Activating with BMW Connected

app
An appropriate BMW Connected app with re‐
mote function can be used to switch on the sys‐
tem either directly or via a preset departure time.
254
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The operation of remote-controlled systems
cific and optional features offered with the series. with the integrated universal remote control,
It also describes features that are not necessarily such as the garage door, may result in injury,
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
selected options or country versions. This also garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
applies to safety-related functions and systems. damage to property. Make sure that the area of
When using these functions and systems, the movement of the respective system is clear
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ during programming and operation. Also follow
served. the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Integrated Universal
Remote Control Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the owner's manual of the system to
Concept
be controlled, the system is generally
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of Control.
remote-controlled systems such as garage door
Additional questions are answered by:
drives, barriers, or lighting systems.
▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified
General information service center or repair shop.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐ ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
Corporation.
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to program
the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐
sible operation.
255
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Control elements on the interior Canada: if programming with the hand-held

mirror transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6. ▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not
complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
▷ Buttons, arrow 1. 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
▷ LED, arrow 2. cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming. If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
Programming systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
General information onds: programming not completed.
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be Repeat steps 3 to 6.
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal
peat steps 3 to 5.
remote control.
1. Switch on standby state. Special feature of the rolling code
2. Initial setup: wireless system
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ led system after repeated programming, please
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes check if the system to be controlled features a
green rapidly. This erases all programming of rolling code radio system.
the buttons on the interior mirror. Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will integrated Universal Remote Control and the
slowly begin flashing orange. system also have to be synchronized.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system Please read the owner's manual to find out how
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm to synchronize the system.
away from the buttons on the interior mirror. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
The required distance depends on the hand- person.
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
256
Synchronizing the universal remote control with ▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
the system: transmitter was detected but program‐
ming is not complete.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system. Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
mirror as described.
gramming procedure.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
If the integrated universal remote control
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the
remains nonoperational, continue with the
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds
special features for change code wireless
for the next step.
systems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
onds: programming not completed.
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐ Repeat steps 3 to 6.
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the
programmed function will be carried out. Operation
Reprogramming individual Warning

buttons The operation of remote-controlled systems
1. Switch on standby state. with the integrated universal remote control,
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be such as the garage door, may result in injury,
programmed. for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐
movement of the respective system is clear
lease the button.
during programming and operation. Also follow
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm mitter.
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
The required distance depends on the hand- The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
held transmitter. erated using the button on the interior mirror
5. Press and hold the button of the desired while the drive-ready or standby state is
function on the hand-held transmitter. switched on. To do this, hold down the button
Canada: if programming with the hand-held within receiving range of the system until the
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ function is activated. The interior mirror LED
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
release the hand-held transmitter button for mitted.
2 seconds.
6. The LED can light up in different ways. Deleting stored functions
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐ All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
ming procedure is completed. tions cannot be deleted individually.
Release the button. Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
257
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror 2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold
flashes green rapidly. the ashtray cover upward.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
Emptying
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the
side.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐
sor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of the
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror cup holder.
lighting switches on.
Ashtray Cigarette lighter
Front center console Safety information
Opening Warning
1. Push the cover forward until it engages. Contact with the hot heating element or the hot
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the objects.
There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk
of damage to property. Take hold of the ciga‐
rette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil‐
dren do not use the cigarette lighter.
258
Operation
NOTICE
Push in the cigarette lighter.
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
moved as soon as it pops back
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
out.
socket cover again after using the socket.
Front center console Sockets

Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Push the cover forward until it engages.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
The cigarette lighter is located between the cup
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
holders.
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding.
Rear center console
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
The cigarette lighter is located in the socket.
259
Pull off the respective cover.

NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can In the cargo area
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Front center console
A socket is located on the right side in the cargo

area. Unfold the cover.
USB interface
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the
section on USB connections, refer to page 65.
In the center armrest
A socket is located between the cup holders.

Pull off the cover.
Rear center console
A USB interface is located in the center armrest.

Properties:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging of mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
▷ With navigation system: for data transfer.
The center console contains one or two sockets.
260
In the rear center console
A USB interface is located in the center console.

Properties:
A USB interface with two USB ports is located in
the center console in the rear. ▷ USB port Type A.
Properties: ▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ Charge current when equipped with tele‐
▷ For charging of mobile devices.
phone service: max. 2.1 A.
▷ Charge current: 3 A per connection.
Steptronic transmission: in the Wireless charging tray

center console
Concept
NOTICE The wireless charging tray enables the following
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large functions to be performed without cables:
USB connectors, may block or damage the ▷ Charging the rechargeable battery of a mo‐
cover when it is being opened or closed. There bile phone with Qi capability and of other mo‐
is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that bile devices, which support the Qi standard.
the area of movement of the cover is clear ▷ Charging the BMW Display key, refer to
while opening and closing it. page 83.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to the external an‐
tenna.
Depending on the country, this provides for
better network reception and a consistent re‐
production quality.
General information
When inserting the mobile phone, make sure
there are no objects between it and the wireless
Push the cover forward until it engages. charging tray.
During charging, the surface of the tray and the
mobile phone may become warm. Higher tem‐
peratures may lead to a reduction in the charge
current through the mobile phone, and in iso‐
261
lated cases the charging process is paused tem‐

porarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the NOTICE
mobile phone owner's manual. The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a
If the vehicle is equipped with a charge indi‐ particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile
cator, the Control Display shows whether a mo‐ phone into the tray can damage the tray or the
bile phone with Qi capability is being charged. mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to
property. Observe the maximum dimensions for
NOTE mobile phones. Do not force the mobile phone
This device has been tested for human exposure into the tray.
limits and found compliant at a minimum dis‐
tance of 4 in/10 cm during operation.
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be
maintained in every direction when operating the ▷ The mobile phone must compatibly support
device. the required Qi standard.
If the mobile phone does not support the Qi
standard, the mobile phone can be charged
using a special Qi-compatible charging case.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Observe the maximum dimensions of the
mobile phone.
▷ Use only protective jackets and covers up to
a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm. Oth‐
erwise, the charging function may be im‐
Mounting position of the product. paired.
▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located in
the center of the tray.
Safety information
Operation
Warning
When charging a device that meets the Qi Overview
standard in the wireless charging tray, any
metal objects located between the device and
the tray can become very hot. Placing storage
devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards,
cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal
transmission, between the device and the tray
may impair the card function. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. When
charging mobile devices, make sure there are
no objects between the device and the tray.
1 LED
2 Storage area
262
Inserting the mobile phone Activating

The mobile phone must not exceed the maxi‐ Via iDrive:
mum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1 x
1. "My Vehicle"
0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.
1. Slide the cover of the storage tray forward.
3. "Wireless charging tray"
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the stor‐
4. "Forgotten mobile device alert"
age tray with the display facing up.
3. Close the cover of the storage compartment.
System limits
Removing the mobile phone At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in
the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile
1. Slide the cover of the storage tray forward. phone may be limited and some functions may
2. Remove the mobile phone. no longer work.
LED displays LTE-Compensator - Information

and User Manual
Color Meaning
Your car is equipped with a wireless charging
Blue The mobile phone is charging. tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and
Depending on the model and the ve‐ connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the
hicle, the blue LED is no longer illumi‐ best possible connection a signal booster (LTE-
nated once the inserted mobile phone Compensator) is used in conjunction with the
with Qi capability is fully charged. WCA. The following paragraphs refer to this
booster:
Orange The mobile phone is not charging. This is a CONSUMER device.
Temperature on the mobile phone BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE‐
possibly too high or foreign object in VICE with your wireless provider and have your
the charging tray. provider's consent. Most wireless providers con‐
Red The mobile phone is not charging. sent to the use of Compensators. Some provid‐
ers may not consent to the use of this device on
Contact a dealer’s service center or
their network. If you are unsure, contact your
another qualified service center or re‐
provider. You MUST operate this device with ap‐
pair shop.
proved antennas and cables as specified by the
manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at
Forgotten warning least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You
MUST cease operating this device immediately if
General information requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless
If the vehicle is equipped with the forgotten service provider. Warning E911 location informa‐
warning function, a warning can be output if a tion may not be provided or may be inaccurate
mobile phone with Qi capability was forgotten in for calls served by using this device.
the wireless charging tray when leaving the vehi‐ Please observe additionally the following infor‐
cle. mation
The forgotten warning is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
263
▷ Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register

their signal boosters by calling their toll-free
number.
▷ T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mo‐
bile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://saqat.t-
mobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#).
▷ Verizon’s online registration link: (http://
www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/consumer/
register-signal-booster.html).
▷ AT&T online registration link (https://
securec45.securewebsession.com/attsignal‐
booster.com/).
▷ U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://
www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fcc-
booster-registration.jsp).
Before use you must register your booster de‐
vice with your wireless provider.
If you should be requested by the FCC to cease
operating your booster you are not allowed to in‐
sert your mobile phone in the charging tray any‐
more unless the booster is permanently deacti‐
vated by your local BMW dealer.
You must not remove the booster from the car
nor use it with any other than the preinstalled
coupling device or antenna. Any modification of
the existing antenna or coupling device as well as
the use of other antennas or coupling devices
will cause the cease of the booster´s operating li‐
cense.
The booster device fulfills the network protection
standards as required by the FCC, such as inter‐
modulation limits, oscillation detection and gain
limits.
Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive
Model Number: LTECOMPB0
Part Number: 6803145-01
FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0
264
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer
to page 266.
options ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 266.
▷ Steptronic transmission: storage compart‐
ment in the center console, refer to
page 267.
selected options or country versions. This also ▷ Center armrest, refer to page 267.
applies to safety-related functions and systems. ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center con‐
When using these functions and systems, the sole, refer to page 267.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
served.
Safety information Glove compartment

Front passenger side
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
Safety information
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown about the car's interior while Warning
driving, for instance in the event of an accident, Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a partment can be thrown into the car's interior
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
terior. cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are availa‐
ble in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 265.
265
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Opening Opening
Pull the handle. Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Closing
Closing Fold cover closed.
Fold cover closed.
Locking Compartments in the doors

The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the glove General information
compartment. There are storage compartments in the doors.
After the glove compartment is locked, the vehi‐
cle key can be handed over without the Safety information
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is
parked by valet parking.
Warning
Driver's side Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or

glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
Safety information
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
Warning not use any breakable objects while driving.
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐ compartments.
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
266
Steptronic transmission: Opening

storage compartment in the
center console
Opening
Press the button.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.

Cup holders
Closing
Touch the cover on the handle bar. The cover Safety information
closes.
Warning
Storage compartment in Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the rear center console the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
The back of the center console contains one or
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
two storage compartments.
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
Center armrest not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Front Do not transport hot beverages.
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
267
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Front Opening and closing
Opening General information

The cup holder can be adjusted for three differ‐
ent container sizes.
Opening
Fold the center armrest forward.

Press the button and fold out the cup holder
fully.
Reducing the size

To make it smaller, the cup holder can be folded
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐ in in 2 steps.
sole.
Enlarging
To make a smaller cup holder bigger, first fold it
Closing
in completely. Then fold the cup holder out again
Touch the cover on the handle bar. The cover fully.
closes.
Closing
Rear Fold in the cup holder fully, until it engages.
Safety information
Clothes hooks
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest General information
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
damage to property. Press back the covers be‐ dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear.
fore the center armrest is folded up.
268
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.
Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.
269
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo area
Warning
options Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ NOTICE
served. Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Loading
Safety information Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
Warning
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐ XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐
hicle.
bility, lengthening the braking distances and
changing the steering response. There is a risk 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐ 4. The resulting figure equals the available
mitted gross weight. amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
Warning sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown about the car's interior while 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
driving, for instance in the event of an accident, and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of weight may not safely exceed the available
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ Step 4.
terior. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
270
Cargo area CONTROLS
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how

this reduces the available cargo and luggage
Lashing eyes in the cargo
load capacity of your vehicle. area
Load General information
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for
securing cargo.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
passenger seat backrests.
Storage compartments in
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐ the cargo area
sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear Multi-function hook
seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle. General information
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to A multi-function hook is located on the left side
stow large cargo. in the cargo area.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
backrests. Safety information
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with ratchet
straps or with a cargo net or draw straps.
Warning
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
Improper use of the multi-function hooks can
straps.
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects,
such as shopping bags, from the multi-function
271
CONTROLS Cargo area
hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the

cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.
Folding down
Lift the cargo floor panel.
Through-loading system
Press on the multi-function hook and turn until it
Concept
engages.
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
the rear seat backrests.
Side storage compartments
General information
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40–
A storage compartment is located on the left and 20–40. The side rear seat backrests and the
right sides in the cargo area. center section can be folded down separately.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down from
the cargo area. The center section can be sepa‐
rately folded down from the rear.
Safety information
Warning
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐
Pull on the straps. rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head
Storage compartment under the restraint is clear prior to folding down.
cargo area floor
There is a storage compartment under the cargo
floor panel. Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
272
Cargo area CONTROLS
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked 3. Push the corresponding head restraint down
after folding it back. as far as it will go.
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area
to release the rear seat backrest. The un‐
Warning locked rear seat backrest moves forward
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ slightly.
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
5. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
NOTICE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.
Folding down the rear seat

Folding back the backrest
backrest from the cargo area
1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety belt
seating position and engage it.
in the rear using the latch plate of another
safety belt. 2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on
the rear window shelf.
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
into the specially designated fixture on the 3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the
rear window shelf. center safety belt. Make sure you hear the
latch plate engage.
Folding down the center section

1. Fold down the center head restraint.
273
CONTROLS Cargo area
2. Press the button and pull the center section Enlarging

forward.
1. Remove the covers of the side storage com‐
partments.
Enlarging the cargo area 2. Lift the cargo floor panel.
General information
The cargo floor panel can be lowered to stow
bulky luggage.
Safety information
NOTICE
The spaces under the cargo area floor are in‐ 3. Stow the covers of the side storage compart‐
tended for the covers of the side storage com‐ ments under the cargo floor panel in the re‐
partments. Other objects may result in damage spectively provided recesses.
to the vehicle electrical system if the cargo area
floor should sink down or in an accident. There
is a risk of damage to property. Only place the
covers of the side storage compartments into
the spaces under the cargo area floor.
274
Cargo area CONTROLS
4. Lift the cargo floor panel by its handle to‐

wards the back and up and lower it.
5. Press the side partition nets downward.
Reducing the size

Proceed in reverse order to make the cargo area
smaller again.
Ski and snowboard bag

The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐
cluded in the protective jacket.
275
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
options
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
cific and optional features offered with the series. Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
It also describes features that are not necessarily speed:
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
selected options or country versions. This also 100 mph/160 km/h.
applies to safety-related functions and systems. Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐
When using these functions and systems, the ces.
served.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
Breaking-in period increased.
Tires
General information
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
Moving parts need to begin working together
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
smoothly.
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ time.
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Safety information
Brake system
Warning Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
Due to new parts and components, safety and effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐ Drive moderately during this break-in period.
lay. There is a risk of accident. After installing
new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conser‐ Following part replacement
vatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐ Observe the break-in procedures again, if com‐
serve the break-in procedures of the respective ponents mentioned above are replaced.
parts and components.
276
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
General driving notes bustible materials can come in contact with hot
vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during
parking.
Closing the trunk lid
Safety information Mobile communication devices

in the vehicle
Warning
An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle Warning
and can endanger occupants and other traffic Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐
participants or damage the vehicle in the event fluence one another. There is radiation due to
of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. the transmission operations of mobile phones.
In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ property. If possible, in the car's interior use
age to property. Do not drive with the trunk lid only mobile phones with direct connections to
open. an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
interference and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.
Driving with the trunk lid open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided: Hydroplaning
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. form between the tires and road surface.
▷ Drive moderately. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning.

It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of
contact between the tires and the road surface,
Hot exhaust gas system
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and
brake the vehicle.
Warning
High temperatures can occur underneath the Driving through water
body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas
system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust General information
gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of When driving through water, follow the following:
injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas sys‐
▷ Drive through calm water only.
tem, including the exhaust pipe.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
Warning ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
If combustible materials, such as leaves or
grass, come in contact with hot parts of the ex‐
haust gas system, these materials can ignite.
There is a risk of fire and injuries. Do not re‐
move the heat shields installed and never apply
undercoating to them. Make sure that no com‐
277
Safety information curely fastened again after they were removed,

for instance for cleaning.
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐ Driving in wet conditions
ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐ When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐
ment, the electrical system or the transmission. tly press the brake pedal every few miles.
There is a risk of damage to property. When
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐
traffic.
mum indicated water level and the maximum
speed for driving through water. The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them against
corrosion.
Braking safely In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
General information
The vehicle is equipped with the Antilock Brake Hills
System ABS as a standard feature.
General information
Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐
quire such. Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any
brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐
obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
ciency.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Brake
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
System ABS is in its active mode.
needed.
In certain braking situations, the perforated brake
discs can emit functional noises. However, func‐ Safety information
tional noises have no effect on the performance
and operational reliability of the brake.
Warning
Objects in the area around the Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
pedals high temperatures, brakes wearing out and
possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of
accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the
Warning brake system.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
Warning
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats In idle state, in the ECO PRO driving mode or
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be with drive-ready state switched off, safety-rele‐
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose vant functions, for instance engine braking ef‐
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. fect, braking force boost, and steering assis‐
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for tance, are restricted or not available at all.
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐ There is a risk of accident. Do not drive in idle
278
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
state, in the ECO PRO driving mode or with Roof drip rail with flaps
drive-ready state switched off.
Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are increased by the following
circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all. The fixing points are located in the roof drip rail
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. above the doors.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning Fold the cover outward.
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
Mounting
pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
generally this cannot be corrected. Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Condensation water under the Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
Magnetic roof-mounted luggage
densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle. racks
Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roof-
mounted luggage racks cannot be used.
Roof-mounted luggage
rack Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
General information
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
Roof racks are available as special accessories. steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
279
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐

tom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐
tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Driving on racetracks
Warning
The vehicle is not designed for use in motor
sport type competition. Excessive race track
operation in the limit range can result in the
sudden failure or malfunction of components.
There is a risk of accident. Do not operate the
vehicle excessively in the limit range. Pay atten‐
tion to anomalies of the vehicle, for instance
brake grinding, and stop race track operation
where required.
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during

racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This
wear is not covered by the warranty.
280
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and Close the windows and glass
sunroof
options
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ results in increased air resistance and raises fuel
cific and optional features offered with the series. consumption.
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the Tires
applies to safety-related functions and systems. General information
When using these functions and systems, the Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ instance tire size may influence consumption.
served.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Reducing fuel consumption
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
General information ing on a long trip.
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
the reduction of consumption and emission val‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ues. tire wear.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors. Drive away without delay
Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐ Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the
ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐ vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
fluence fuel consumption and the environmental away, but at moderate engine speeds.
impact.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐
gine up to operating temperature.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Look well ahead when driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
Remove attached parts following consumption.
use Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐ driving ahead of you.
lowing use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐ Avoid high engine speeds
namics and increase the fuel consumption.
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
281
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐

cator, refer to page 151.
Using the hybrid system
efficiently
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot off Concept
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. The vehicle's hybrid system runs automatically.
For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐ Through foresighted driving, the hybrid proper‐
ator and let the vehicle roll. ties are efficiently used, i.e., fuel consumption
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. and energy recovery are optimized.
The high-voltage battery is charged.

Optimizing energy recovery
Charge regularly Types of energy recovery
Charge the vehicle as often as possible at a
Energy recovery is used to charge the high-volt‐
charging facility. This will further reduce fuel con‐
age battery. Energy recovery is important for the
sumption due to the use of electrical energy.
supply of electrical components and thus a pre‐
requisite for fuel efficiency. Energy recovery ap‐
Switch off the engine during pears in three stages during coasting and brak‐
longer stops ing:
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐ ▷ Low energy recovery: while coasting to a halt
stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in without stepping on the brake.
traffic congestion. ▷ Average energy recovery: while decelerating
slightly by gently pressing the brake pedal.
Switch off any functions that are ▷ Maximum energy recovery: when pressing
not currently needed the brake pedal somewhat more firmly pro‐
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐ vided that the pointer remains in the middle
dow defroster require a lot of energy and in‐ area of the CHARGE indicator in the instru‐
crease fuel consumption, especially in city and ment cluster, refer to page 143.
stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not needed. Optimum energy recovery
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐ Foresighted driving and decelerating helps with
ergy conserving use of comfort features. These optimizing energy recovery.
functions are automatically deactivated partially As soon as the display shows the maximum en‐
or completely. ergy recovery, only press the brake pedal harder
if required by the situation.
Have maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve Exemplary traffic situations for fuel
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW efficiency
recommends that maintenance work be per‐ In many driving situations, the hybrid system al‐
formed by a BMW service center. lows for a particularly efficient energy manage‐
For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐ ment.
tem, refer to page 341. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic:
282
The combustion engine is switched on or

over automatically by the hybrid system.
ECO PRO
▷ Driving with constant speed:
Concept
The electric motor relieves the combustion
engine periodically by also being switched on. ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
consumption. For this purpose, the engine con‐
trol and comfort features, for instance the climate
Optimizing fuel consumption control output, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐
Charging the vehicle regularly
cally decoupled from the transmission in the
Charge the vehicle regularly and completely us‐ D selector lever position and the engine is
ing a suitable charging device. This will reduce switched off. The D selector lever position re‐
fuel consumption due to the use of electrical en‐ mains engaged.
ergy.
In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
Longer idle periods, refer to page 362, can re‐ PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an efficient
duce the charge state of the high-voltage bat‐ driving style.
tery.
General information
Avoiding the use of the combustion
The system includes the following
engine
EfficientDynamics functions and
Follow the following information to avoid using EfficientDynamics displays:
the combustion engine:
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 284.
▷ Set the characteristics of the hybrid system
to MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 123. ▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 284.
▷ Follow the indicators for electric driving, refer

to page 142, in the instrument cluster.
Overview
Using the navigation system

regularly
Use the navigation system also for familiar and
regularly traveled routes. When the navigation
system destination guidance is active, the hybrid
system uses the existing navigation data. The
upcoming course of the road is analyzed. Hybrid
operation adapts to the specific route sections.
The function may be restricted if the navigation Button
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
Activating ECO PRO
Press the button. ECO PRO is displayed
283
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Configuring ECO PRO ECO PRO seat climate control

INDIVIDUAL The output of seat heating and, where applica‐
ble, seat ventilation is reduced when ECO PRO
Opening via the Driving Dynamics is activated.
Control
1. Activate ECO PRO. ECO PRO climate control
2. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" Climate control is set to be efficient.
This means, it is possible to deviate slightly from
Opening via iDrive the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's
interior more slowly, to economize on consump‐
1. "My Vehicle"
tion.
The mirror heating is made available when exter‐
3. "Driving Experience Control" nal temperatures are very cold.
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting. ECO PRO Sight
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
rently used. window defroster is reduced.
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO Resetting the settings

functions Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐ settings:
vated/deactivated: "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning"
▷ "ECO PRO seat climate control"
Driving style analysis
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO sight" Concept
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently The function helps develop an especially effi‐
used. cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
ECO PRO limit
The assessment is done in various categories
▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit: and is displayed on the Control Display.
"ECO PRO speed warning" This display will help you adjust your driving style
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of and save some fuel.
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed: General information
"Tip at:" The current trip is assessed.
Select the desired speed. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by ad‐
justing your driving style.
284
This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO Driving

style analysis
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO Driving style analy‐

sis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup
table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driving
style. The more efficient the driving style, the
smoother the depicted route becomes, arrow 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more effi‐
cient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number
of stars are displayed.
285
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
Charging the vehicle

Vehicle features and ▷ Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging sta‐
tion.
options ▷ Charging via an inductive charging station.
Level 1 charging is possible via a household
socket with a voltage of 120 volts.
It also describes features that are not necessarily For optimal use of the energy from the power
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the mains, charging at a charging station, for in‐
selected options or country versions. This also stance BMW Wallbox, is recommended.
When using these functions and systems, the Charge current
served. General information
The charge current strength is indicated in am‐
peres.
Concept
The vehicle cannot automatically detect the max‐
The vehicle can be charged using various charg‐ imum permissible charge current strength of the
ing cables at charging stations or household power grid during charging via a household
sockets. Control and monitoring of the charging socket or charging station.
process are handled completely automatically.
The charge current strength can be set via Level 1 charging
iDrive. Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own
household socket, as well as when charging at
external electrical power sockets in Level 1, the
General information allowed charge current strength must be deter‐
mined, for instance by a qualified electrician.
High-voltage battery The charge current strength for Level 1 charg‐
ing, refer to page 292, can be adjusted in the ve‐
The high-voltage battery is used as an energy
hicle in three levels.
accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be
charged by energy recovery during the trip or via At delivery, the charge current for Level 1 charg‐
the power grid. ing is set to the lowest level.
In order to operate the high-voltage battery opti‐ Depending on the country-specific version, one
mally, charge the vehicle regularly and fully using of several ampere ratings is printed on the
a compatible charger. Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rating is the
limit which must be adhered to for the vehicle if
When charging via the power grid, you can chose
the charge current is set to the highest level. De‐
between the following variants.
pending on the charge current, the charge cur‐
▷ Level 1 charging via a household socket. rent strength may vary when lower levels are set.
286
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
Overview
Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting
"Max." "Reduced" "Low"
6A 6A 6A 6A
8A 8A 6A 6A
10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6A
12 A 12 A 9A 6A
15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A
Inductive charging:
Charge current setting during inductive charging
"Max." "Reduced" "Low"
16 A 11.25 A 7.5 A
Depending on the charge current setting, the

charging duration changes. Warning
A faulty and incorrectly designed charging de‐
Maintaining the charge state vice at the charging location can cause damage
To conserve the electrical range for a later time to the vehicle and overload the power mains at
during the trip, BATTERY CONTROL, refer to the charging location. There is a risk of fire and
page 124, can be used to maintain or increase a risk of injury.
the current state of charge of the high-voltage The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
battery. that, prior to your first use of a charging loca‐
tion, you have the compatibility of the following
components confirmed:
Safety information ▷ Charging cable.
▷ Charging station.
Warning ▷ Household socket and connected circuits.
Improper working with electrical current can
lead to an electric shock due to high voltages or
high currents. There is a risk of fire or danger to Warning
life. Observe the general safety regulations Damaged or worn charging devices, for in‐
when working with electrical current. stance worn contacts, can heat up. There is a
risk of fire. Only use charging devices that are
in good condition.
287
A dealer's service center will be glad to provide

Warning information about suitable charging cables.
Simultaneous charging and refueling poses a
risk of fire if a sufficient safety distance from
easily flammable materials is not maintained. Warning
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to Improper use of the charging cable can prevent
property. Do not fill the vehicle with fuel and charging and lead to damage, for instance ca‐
charge it simultaneously. ble fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the charging
cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not
extend it using cables or adapters.
Warning
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. High voltage is present at the Warning
charging connection. There is a risk of injury or Damaged charging cables can heat up or lead
danger to life. to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire or a
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends risk of injury. Use undamaged charging cables
that work on the charging connection, for in‐ only.
stance cleaning, be performed by a dealer’s
ter or repair shop. Level 1 charging cable
Depending on the country version, the vehicle is
supplied with a Level 1 charging cable.
Charging cable Level 1 charging cables can be used to charge
the vehicle from grounded household sockets.
Charging at household socket connections is
General information performed with alternating current.
Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charging When a Level 1 charging cable is used, the effi‐
cable or the permanently installed charging cable ciency values may differ from those stated on the
of a charging station to charge the vehicle. energy label.
Different charging cables can be required de‐
pending on the country. Level 2 charging cable
The Level 2 charging cable makes it possible to
Safety information quickly recharge at sockets of designated
Level 2 charging stations using a special plug.
Warning Charging is performed with alternating current at
designated Level 2 charging stations. The charg‐
Non-compatible charging cables or unsuitable
ing process can be completed faster than at
charging stations can heat up and cause dam‐
household sockets.
age to the vehicle. There is a risk of fire. Use
charging cables or charging stations for charg‐ A charge current strength of up to maxi‐
ing that are suitable for the respective vehicle mum 16 A is possible.
type. The charging cable may be permanently installed
at the charging station.
288
Storage Connecting the charging cable

To connect, engage selector lever position P,
deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the vehi‐
cle. Set the parking brake, if needed.
1. To open the charging socket flap, press on
the rear edge, arrow. The charging socket
flap opens.
The Level 1 charging cable is located in a bag in

the cargo area.
If required, store the charging cable with the in‐

stalled plug cover to prevent moisture in the
charging cable plug.
Connecting 2. Connect the Level 1 charging cable to the

household socket or the Level 2 charging ca‐
Charging socket flap ble to the port on the charging station.
3. Insert the appropriate charging cable plug,
and push it in until it engages.
Removing
When the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is
locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the
cable.
If necessary, clean the area between the charg‐
ing socket flap and charging socket, for instance
The charging socket flap is located on the left from snow, before removing it.
side of the vehicle.
1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key if it is
Always keep charging socket clean and unob‐ locked.
structed.
Charging cable is unlocked.
Keep the charging socket flap closed when the
2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐
charging socket is not used.
row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the
gripping areas.
289
Charging process is interrupted. The charging cable is manually unlocked.
3. Remove the charging cable from the charg‐ 4. For removing the charging cable, refer to
ing socket, arrow 2. page 289.
4. Press on the charging socket flap until it en‐ Have the locking system of the charging socket
gages. checked at the dealer’s service center or another
5. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the qualified service center or repair shop after emer‐
household socket or Level 2 charging cable gency unlocking of the charging cable.
from the port on the charging station as appli‐
cable.
6. Stow the charging cable.
Charging process
At a charging station, insert the permanently
installed charging cable in the place provided
General information
for it. At high temperatures, the high-voltage battery is
initially cooled. There may be a delay before
Emergency unlocking charging starts. If the high-voltage battery is dis‐
charged, cooling of the high-voltage battery may
The charging cable is locked when the vehicle is
not be possible. The charging process cannot be
locked and during the charging process.
started.
In case of an electrical malfunction, the charging
If the Level 1 charging cable is exposed to high
cable can be manually unlocked.
temperatures and direct sunlight, this may inter‐
1. Open the hood. rupt the charging process. Charging will resume
2. Release the button from the holder. automatically.
3. Pull the knob. The charging process may take longer under ex‐
tremely low or high temperatures.
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the power mains connection
can lead to damage, for instance cable fire.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Use the charging cable only for charg‐
290
ing the vehicle, and do not extend it using ca‐

bles or adapters.
Warning
If the charge current strength is adjusted incor‐
rectly, the power mains of the household
socket can be overloaded and overheat. There
is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current
strength to the power mains prior to charging
Charging status
on household sockets. With unknown power
networks, set on the lowest level.
Light Charging status
White Charging cable can be con‐

Starting the charging process nected or removed.
1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the
Flashes yel‐ Charging process is being pre‐
parking brake, if needed.
low pared.
2. For planning the charging process, refer to
page 291. Blue Charging process paused.
3. Switch off drive-ready state. Flashes blue Charging process is active.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the Flashes red Fault in the charging process.
to the port on the charging station. Green Charging process is completed.
5. Open the charging socket flap.
When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light
6. Connect the charging cable to the vehicle, re‐
goes out after some time.
fer to page 289.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the blue indicator
7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
light flashes continuously. The other indicator
lights go out after some time.
Charging status display
To check the charging state, press the but‐
ton on the vehicle key. The charging status is in‐
Indicator light at the charging
dicated on the indicator light. In some cases the
socket
vehicle is locked.
The charging status for charging with a charging
Additional messages about the charging status
cable is indicated on the charging socket indica‐
can be displayed in the instrument cluster, on the
tor light.
BMW display key, or via the BMW Con‐
nected app on a smartphone.
Planning the charging process
General information
The charging process can be adapted to con‐
straints, such as the cost of electricity, available
291
power sources, or a low ambient temperature. If a charging window that allows favorable charg‐
The vehicle controls the charging process in ing has not been set, the charging process auto‐
such a way that the charging process is com‐ matically starts as late as possible when the am‐
pleted if possible at the departure time. A depar‐ bient temperature is low. Charging directly
ture time must be set for this purpose, refer to before the departure optimizes the temperature
page 297. and the state of charge of the high-voltage bat‐
The following settings are available: tery. Do not set a time window if the ambient
temperature is low.
▷ Immediate charging.
▷ Charging at departure time. Setting the time window for
▷ Set time window for favorable charging. favorable-rate
▷ Set charging via a Level 1 charging cable. If a departure time is set, a time window for
▷ Intelligent charging. charging with a favorable electricity rate can be
set.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can
be made via iDrive. Settings for the stationary cli‐ Via iDrive:
mate control and charging process are also ac‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
cepted for planned departure times.
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
Intelligent charging can be ignored for the next
charging process. 3. "Time slot: -"
4. Set rate begin.
1. Switch off drive-ready state.
5. Set rate end.
2. "Charge immediately once"
Intelligent charging enables the time window to
be set automatically for certain locations.
Immediate charging
The vehicle can also start the charging process
The charging process starts as soon as the
before the selected time window begins or end it
charging cable is connected.
after the selected time window finishes. The
Via iDrive: starting point of the charging process is adjusted
1. "My Vehicle" so the vehicle can be as fully charged as possible
and, if applicable, its climate adjusted by the de‐
parture time.
3. "Charge immediately"
be made via iDrive.
Charging at departure time
The set time window can be ignored for the next
If a departure time has been set, it is possible to charging process: "Charge immediately once"
set charging to take place at the departure time.
Via iDrive: Setting the charge current for
1. "My Vehicle" charging via level 1 charging cable
or inductive charging
Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle
3. "Low-cost charging for departure"
must be charged with a different charge current
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can strength, refer to page 286.
be made via iDrive.
292
Via iDrive: mental conditions, such as the availability of solar

power or time-variable electricity rates. Intelligent
1. "My Vehicle"
charging is part of BMW's Digital Charging Serv‐
2. "Plan charging/climate control" ice.
3. "Settings charging current" Further information about the Digital Charging
4. "Charging current" Service is available on the Internet:
Settings are stored. When you change charging https://charging.bmwgroup.com
locations you also might need to change the set‐
ting for charging. General information
Set the charge current strength at other house‐ Intelligent charging does not display an end of
hold sockets to the lowest level. charge time in the instrument cluster.
Stopping the charging process be made via iDrive.
The charging process can be stopped at any Intelligent charging can be ignored for the next
time by removing the charging cable and contin‐ charging process.
ued at a later time by connecting the charging
cable. This enables, for instance the use of other 1. Switch off drive-ready state.
loads on the power connection or prevents si‐ 2. "Charge immediately once"
multaneous high power from multiple loads.
For removing the charging cable, refer to Functional requirements
page 289. ▷ Account on the BMW charging portal.
▷ A subscription to the intelligent charging
Continuing the charging process service has been obtained.
If the charging process is interrupted, for in‐ ▷ Suitable Wallbox.
stance through a temporary power failure, the ▷ Departure time set, refer to page 297.
charging process is automatically continued after
the interruption. ▷ Charge current strength setting to highest
level, refer to page 292.
Terminating the charging
Configuring the BMW charging
process service
1. Remove the charging cable from the vehicle,
Use one of the following to configure the
refer to page 289.
BMW charging service:
2. Stow the charging cable as required.
▷ BMW remote app on the smartphone.
3. Press on the charging socket flap until it en‐
▷ BMW charging portal in the Internet.
gages.
4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked. Activating intelligent charging
Via iDrive:
Intelligent charging
1. "My Vehicle"
Concept 2. "Plan charging/climate control"
Intelligent charging can adapt the charging proc‐ 3. "Low-cost charging for departure"
ess dynamically via the Internet to the environ‐ 4. "Intelligent charging"
293
BMW Wireless Charging to property. Only use an inductive charging sta‐

tion that the vehicle manufacturer has classified
Concept as suitable.
BMW Wireless Charging enables the vehicle to

charge inductively. The charging process is exe‐ Overview
cuted wirelessly via a magnetic field. The charg‐
The BMW Wireless Charging system consists of
ing process is controlled and monitored auto‐
multiple components.
matically. The charge current strength can be set
via iDrive, refer to page 292.
Safety information
Warning
An electromagnetic field is generated under the
vehicle during inductive charging. This may
cause damage to pacemakers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. During the charging
1 Inductive charging station, GroundPad
process, do not reach under the vehicle or carry
out any work under it. 2 Vehicle component, CarPad
3 High-voltage battery
Warning General information

Objects on the inductive charging station or the The charging process starts automatically when
vehicle component may heat up. There is a risk the CarPad is positioned over the GroundPad.
of fire. Remove any objects before inductive To make charging convenient, park in a forward
charging. position and position the GroundPad between
the front wheels.
Keep the surface and the ventilation grille of the
NOTICE GroundPad clean and unobstructed.
An electromagnetic field is generated under the The GroundPad switches itself off automatically
vehicle during inductive charging. Magnetized if it detects any people, animals or larger metallic
objects such as credit cards or storage media objects. Charging continues automatically once
may not work correctly. There is a risk of dam‐ no more foreign objects are detected.
age to property. Make sure that there are no
An LED on the GroundPad indicates it is ready
magnetized objects under the vehicle during
for operation.
the charging process.
▷ The GroundPad has been installed and com‐
NOTICE
missioned by a qualified electrician.
Inductive charging stations that the vehicle
▷ The GroundPad is installed on an even sur‐
manufacturer has classified as unsuitable may
face in order to maintain the correct distance
damage systems or result in functions no lon‐
ger being executed. There is a risk of damage
294
between the components and allow heat to front of the GroundPad, the positioning view
be dissipated. opens. Position the vehicle over the GroundPad
▷ The GroundPad is connected to the CarPad. with the help of the positioning view. Follow the
instructions on the Control Display while posi‐
▷ The vehicle's CarPad is positioned over the
tioning the vehicle.
GroundPad correctly.
Connecting/disconnecting the 1. If necessary, press the park assistance

button.
GroundPad
2. If necessary "Wireless Charging"
In order to position the vehicle over the Ground‐
Pad correctly, the GroundPad and CarPad must 3. Engage selector lever position D if necessary.
be able to communicate with one another over Lines are displayed on the camera image.
WLAN. Set up the WLAN connection to enable
4. Position the vehicle so the GroundPad is be‐
this communication.
tween the lines on the camera image.
You will need to enter a code the first time the
connection is established. The code is supplied
with the GroundPad.
To connect the CarPad to the GroundPad, posi‐
tion the vehicle over the GroundPad.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Parking" 5. Drive forward slowly until the display changes
4. "Wireless Charging" to the positioning view.
5. "Manage induct. charging stations"
Select the GroundPad displayed in order to
connect.
6. "Connect/disconnect"
7. Enter the WLAN code.
The GroundPad is connected to the CarPad.
The GroundPad is displayed in the list of
known GroundPads.
If the vehicle is near the GroundPad, the connec‐ 6. Position the vehicle slowly until the solid cir‐
tion is automatically restored, refer to page 296. cle is located within the ring.
Multiple GroundPads can be stored.
Proceed in the same way to disconnect the
GroundPad. The charging process is interrupted
when the GroundPad is disconnected.
Starting the charging process

Before the charging process starts, approach the
GroundPad at max. 6 mph/10 km/h. 33 ft/10 m in
295
The color of the solid circle in the positioning Via iDrive:

view changes to green. The CarPad is posi‐
1. "My Vehicle"
tioned over the GroundPad correctly.
3. "Parking"
4. "Wireless Charging"
5. "Manage induct. charging stations"
Select the GroundPad displayed in order to
remove it.
6. "Delete from "Known inductive charging
stations""
7. Set the parking brake. The GroundPad is removed. The WLAN

code is deleted.
All the stored GroundPads can be removed too.
The charging process starts.
1. "My Vehicle"
Charging status display 2. "Vehicle settings"
The charging screen in the instrument cluster, 3. "Parking"
refer to page 141, or the GroundPad LED dis‐ 4. "Wireless Charging"
plays the charging state.
Additional messages about the charging status 5. Press the button.
can be displayed in the instrument cluster, on the
6. "Delete all charging stations"
BMW display key, or via the BMW Con‐
nected app on a smartphone.
Reinitializing the object detection of
the GroundPad
Automatic display of positioning
view The detection of metal objects may have to be
reinitialized, such as after a power failure. A
The positioning view can be displayed automati‐
Check Control message is displayed. In addition,
cally whenever the vehicle is in range of the
the LED on the GroundPad flashes briefly three
GroundPad.
times.
Via iDrive:
1. Remove objects from the GroundPad where
1. "My Vehicle" required.
3. "Parking"
4. "Wireless Charging"
5. "Automatic display"
Removing the GroundPad

The GroundPad can be removed from the list of
known GroundPads.
296
2. For the initialization, place a metal object Display Meaning

such as a coin onto the induction coil.
Indicator in white: maximum electrical
range.
Departure time set.
Climate control activated at depar‐

ture time.
Flashing: ventilation active.

3. Remove the metal object from the induction
coil after 10 seconds.
The initialization of the object detection is fin‐ Flashing: heating active.
ished. The LED of the GroundPad lights up
steadily or flashes once.
Flashing: cooling active.

cluster
Departure time
The charge state indicator light, refer to
page 142, shows the charge state of the high- Concept
voltage battery in the instrument cluster, if
standby state is switched on. If all bars are filled, For optimum range and climate control, the de‐
the high-voltage battery is fully charged. parture time can be set before parking the vehi‐
cle.
Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage system
is still under high voltage.
General information
Information regarding the charging process are
With a set departure time, the vehicle is pre‐
shown on the charging screen, refer to
heated or precooled during the charging process
page 141.
if climate control is set. Climate control output is
Display Meaning reduced during the trip. This increases the range
during electric driving.
End of charging time or set depar‐
ture time. The following settings are possible for departure
time:
Charging progress bar. ▷ Climate control for departure time.
▷ Scheduling of up to three regular departure
times.
Indicator in blue: charged electrical
range.
be made via iDrive. Settings for climate control
and charging process are also applied for sched‐
uled departure times.
297
Climate control for departure ▷ Planned climate control at the set departure
time time, refer to page 253.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" Discharged high-voltage

2. "Plan charging/climate control" and vehicle battery
3. "Precondition for departure"
General information
Setting the departure time In addition to the high-voltage battery, the vehi‐
Via iDrive: cle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is re‐
quired for operation of the onboard electronics.
1. "My Vehicle"
If the high-voltage battery is discharged and the
combustion engine is started, air conditioning
3. "Next departure:" may be limited.
4. Set the time and weekday. With a discharged vehicle battery, no operation
Up to three departure times can be set. of the vehicle is possible.
Activating the departure time Starting the vehicle

Via iDrive: If the vehicle battery is discharged, the combus‐
tion engine can be started using the battery of
1. "My Vehicle" another vehicle and two jumper cables, see
2. "Plan charging/climate control" Jump-starting, refer to page 354.
3. "Next departure:"
Set departure times are displayed.
4. For example activate "Departure time 1".
Up to three departure times can be activated.
The set departure time will be deactivated, if the
departure time was ignored three times in a row.
Climate control
General information
The following settings for vehicle air conditioning
are possible:
▷ Activate stationary climate control immedi‐
ately, refer to page 252.
The range is reduced if stationary climate
control is activated without a charging cable
connected.
298
Refueling MOBILITY
Refueling
NOTICE
options With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
When using these functions and systems, the Tank vent
served.
Concept
The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel tank.
General information The fuel tank is designed for special require‐
ments that arise from hybrid operation of the ve‐
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to hicle, i.e., alternating drive with combustion en‐
page 302, prior to refueling. gine or electric motor.
To also ensure all engine functions under unfav‐
orable conditions, for instance steep vehicle incli‐ General information
nations, at least 3 US gal/10 liters fuel should be Excess pressure may build up in the fuel tank as
refueled. a result of gasoline vapors; this pressure is dissi‐
pated before the fuel cap is opened.
Warning
easily flammable materials is not maintained.
property. Do not fill the vehicle with fuel and
charge it simultaneously.
The button is located in the storage compart‐

ment of the driver's door.
Venting the tank

299
MOBILITY Refueling
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

2. Press the button to start the pressure
equalization.
The tank venting status is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster. In rare cases, tank venting
can last several minutes.
When tank venting has finished, a message is
displayed in the instrument cluster. The fuel
filler flap is released for opening.
3. Open the fuel filler flap.
If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
after tank venting, press the button again. the fuel filler flap.
If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler
flap even after pressing the button again, un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually, refer to
page 300.
Fuel cap
Opening
Before opening, vent the tank, refer to page 299.
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear Closing
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with
an electrical fault.
300
Refueling MOBILITY
The release is located in the cargo area. Safety information

1. Open the cover on the right side trim.
Warning
easily flammable materials is not maintained.
property. Do not fill the vehicle with fuel and
charge it simultaneously.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym‐ NOTICE
bol. This silently releases the fuel filler flap. Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
3. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens. surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
4. Carefully open the fuel cap. Excess pressure Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
can build up in the fuel tank from gasoline va‐ is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.
por.
5. Refuel the vehicle as usual. The excess pres‐
sure in the tank may make refueling difficult,
for instance the fuel pump nozzle may shut
off frequently.
Follow the following when

refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
301
MOBILITY Fuel
Fuel
options
CAUTION
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
cific and optional features offered with the series. harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
It also describes features that are not necessarily ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the stalling, especially under certain environmental
selected options or country versions. This also conditions such as high ambient temperature
applies to safety-related functions and systems. and high altitude, may occur.
When using these functions and systems, the If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
served. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
Fuel recommendation chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
General information may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
Depending on the region, many gas stations sell nance.
fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier. NOTICE
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
Gasoline wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
General information converter is permanently damaged. There is a
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. the following in the case of gasoline engines:
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ ▷ Leaded gasoline.
taining metal must not be used. ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, or iron.
i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
dards: ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
302
Fuel MOBILITY
NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and
the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage
of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel
with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to
M100.
NOTICE
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
quality can compromise engine function or
cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.
Recommended fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 91.
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated
performance and consumption values.
Minimum fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating,
the engine may produce knocking sounds when
starting at high external temperatures. This has
no effect on the engine life.
303
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and Tire inflation pressure
specifications
options
In the tire inflation pressure table
cific and optional features offered with the series. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
It also describes features that are not necessarily page 306, contains all tire inflation pressure
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
selected options or country versions. This also ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
applies to safety-related functions and systems. values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
When using these functions and systems, the facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
served. please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
On the Control Display

General information
The current tire inflation pressure values and the
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure intended tire inflation pressure values for the
influence the following: mounted tires can be displayed on the Control
▷ The service life of the tires. Display.
▷ Road safety. To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
▷ Driving comfort. tire sizes must be stored in the system and must
have been set, refer to page 318, for the
▷ Fuel consumption.
mounted tires.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
Safety information
cated on each tire.
The reference tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
Warning cated in the lower area of the Control Display.
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure
may heat up significantly and sustain damage. Checking the tire inflation
This will have a negative impact on aspects of pressure
handling, such as steering and braking re‐
sponse. There is a risk of accident. Regularly
General information
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐ Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
fore a long trip. pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-read
by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
304
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Checking using tire inflation The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied
pressure specifications in the tire automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐
inflation pressure table tings have been made.
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐ Pressure Monitor TPM.
bient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when Tire inflation pressures up to
the tires are cold, i.e.: 100 mph/160 km/h
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
been exceeded. optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
page 306, and adjust as necessary.
2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure
levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual
tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐
tended tire inflation pressure.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
onto the tire valves. These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
Checking using the tire inflation pillar.
pressure specifications on the
Control Display Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Check whether the current tire inflation pres‐
sure levels deviate from the intended tire
pressure value.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual
tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐
tended tire inflation pressure.
After correcting the tire inflation

pressure
With runflat tires:
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
With Tire Pressure Monitor TPM:
305
Tire inflation pressure values up Tire size Pressure specifica‐

to 100 mph/160 km/h tions in bar/PSI
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.3 / 33 -

530e, 530e xDrive 98 V XL M+S
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41

tions in bar/PSI 100 V XL M+S
Specifications in Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of

bar/PSI with cold T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
tires M 4.2 / 60
225/55 R 17 97 H 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 Tire inflation pressures at max.

A/S speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
245/45 R 18 100 H
XL A/S Warning
225/55 R 17 97 Y In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess
245/45 R 18 100 Y of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if
XL necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐
225/55 R 17 97 H M ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
+S table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire
damage and accidents could occur.
245/45 R 18 100 V
XL M+S
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐
245/40 R 19 98 H 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in
XL A/S the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
245/40 R 19 98 H page 306, and adjust as necessary.
XL M+S
Tire inflation pressure values
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.3 / 33 -
over 100 mph/160 km/h
98 Y XL
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41 530e, 530e xDrive

100 Y XL Without high-speed tuning feature
Front: 245/45 R 18 2.3 / 33 -
100 Y XL
Rear: 275/40 R 18 - 2.8 / 41

99 Y
Front: 2.7 / 39 -
245/35 R 20 95 Y XL
Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.2 / 46

97 Y XL
306
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Tire size Pressure specifica‐

tions in bar/PSI tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45

bar/PSI with cold 100 V XL M+S
tires
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
225/55 R 17 97 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 M 4.2 / 60
A/S
245/45 R 18 100 H With high-speed tuning feature
XL A/S
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
225/55 R 17 97 Y tions in bar/PSI
245/45 R 18 100 Y
Specifications in
XL
bar/PSI with cold
225/55 R 17 97 H M tires
+S
245/45 R 18 100 V
XL M+S 225/55 R 17 97 Y 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
245/45 R 18 100 Y
245/40 R 19 98 H 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48
XL
XL A/S
245/40 R 19 98 H Front: 245/45 R 18 2.6 / 38 -
XL M+S 100 Y XL
Front: 245/45 R 18 2.6 / 38 - Rear: 275/40 R 18 - 3.1 / 45

100 Y XL 99 Y
Rear: 275/40 R 18 - 3.1 / 45 Front: 245/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 -

99 Y 98 Y XL
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.3 / 33 - Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45

98 Y XL 100 Y XL
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41 Front: 2.9 / 42 -

100 Y XL 245/35 R 20 95
Y XL
Front: 2.7 / 39 -
245/35 R 20 95 Y XL Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.4 / 49
97 Y XL
Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.2 / 46
97 Y XL Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 -
M 4.2 / 60
98 V XL M+S
307
Tire identification marks xxx: tire size and tire design

3819: tire age
Tire size Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm Tire age
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code Recommendation
18: rim diameter in inches Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least
every 6 years.
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire on
Maximum tire load the tire's sidewall.
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved. Designation Manufacture date
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall DOT … 3819 38th week, 2019
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on
the certification label on the driver door B-pillar.
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Quality grades can be found where applicable on
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
tire loads, respectively. maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
Speed letter A
Designation Maximum speed DOT Quality Grades

Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h
Temperature A B C
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V up to 150 mph/240 km/h Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
Tire Identification Number
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3819 The relative performance of tires depends upon
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand the actual conditions of their use, however, and
308
may depart significantly from the norm due to RSC – Run-flat tires
variations in driving habits, service practices and
Run-flat tires, refer to page 312, are labeled with
differences in road characteristics and climate.
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
marked on the sidewall.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are M+S
AA, A, B, and C.
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop weather performance than summer tires.
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may Tire tread
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based Summer tires
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐ Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
planing, or peak traction characteristics. 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning.
Temperature
Winter tires
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
when tested under controlled conditions on a winter operation.
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the Minimum tread depth
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
ance which all passenger car tires must meet un‐
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's

The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐ circumference and have the legally required min‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not imum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
The positions of the wear indicators are marked
excessive loading, either separately or in com‐
on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐
bination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tor.
tire failure.
309
Tire damage ported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires,

but have them replaced.
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign Warning
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐ section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to ble, avoid driving over objects or road condi‐
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐ tions that may damage tires, or drive over them
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐ slowly and carefully.
file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
Changing wheels and tires
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
Mounting and wheel balancing
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out
to pull to the left or right.
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐ service center or repair shop.
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs. Wheel and tire combination
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low. General information
▷ Vehicle overloading. You can ask the dealer's service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
Safety information
Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, Warning
which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your
is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐
while driving, immediately reduce speed and
stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐
stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this
erances despite the same official size rating.
purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
ter or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or trans‐
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
310
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your New tires

vehicle type.
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
Warning time.
Mounted steel wheels can cause technical Drive conservatively for the first
problems, for instance unexpected loosening of 200 miles/300 km.
the lug bolts and damage to the brake discs.
There is a risk of accident. Do not mount steel Retreaded tires
wheels.
Warning
Warning Retreaded tires can have different tire casing
structures. With advanced age the service life
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a
can be limited. There is a risk of an accident.
negative impact on the vehicle's handling and
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
on the function of a variety of systems, such as
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
the ABS Anti-lock Brake System or DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control. There is a risk of acci‐
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec‐
dent. To maintain good handling and vehicle
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
response, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer. The
manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that Winter tires
you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for General information
your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have Winter tires are recommended for operating on
the original wheel/tire combination remounted winter roads.
on the vehicle as soon as possible.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same level of perform‐
Recommended tire brands ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐
mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐
able from a dealer's service center or another
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐ exceed the permissible maximum speed.
cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
Changing runflat tires
sidewall.
For your own safety, use only runflat tires. Fur‐
ther information is available from a dealer's serv‐
311
ice center or another qualified service center or

repair shop.
Run-flat tires
Rotating wheels between axles Concept

Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐
stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐
Warning
plete loss of tire inflation pressure.
Rotating tires between the axles on vehicles
with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front General information
and rear axles can cause damage to the tires
and the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Do The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐
not rotate the tires between the axles on vehi‐ ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the rims.
front and rear axles. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
Different wear patterns can occur on the front of a tire inflation pressure loss.
and rear axles depending on individual driving Follow the instructions for continued driving with
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐ a flat tire.
tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐
formation is available from a dealer's service cen‐ Safety information
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and
correct, if needed. Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat
Storing tires tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐
stance, reduced lane stability when braking,
Tire inflation pressure braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Storage
▷ Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark Label
place.
▷ Always protect tires against all contact with
oil, grease, and solvents.
▷ Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with

RSC Run-flat System Component.
312
Repairing a flat tire ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
Safety measures wheel electronics. In this case, have the elec‐
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from tronics checked and replaced at the next op‐
passing traffic and on solid ground. portunity.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ The compressor can be used to check the
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by tire inflation pressure.
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels Overview
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock. Storage
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
The Mobility System is in the left storage com‐
Concept partment of the cargo area.
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can

be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel. Sealant container
To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the
tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility
System found on the compressor and sealant
container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more. ▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Contact a dealer's service center or another ▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
qualified service center or repair shop if the Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ Do not remove foreign bodies that have pe‐
netrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects
if they are visibly protruding from the tire.
313
Compressor Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
1 Sealant container unlocking late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
2 Sealant container holder life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
3 Tire pressure gage ficient ventilation.
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button

5 On/off switch
NOTICE
6 Compressor
The compressor can overheat during extended
7 Connector/cable for socket operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
8 Connection hose erty. Do not run the compressor for more than
10 minutes.
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from Filling
passing traffic and on solid ground. 1. Shake the sealant container.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
314
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of 5. With the compressor switched off, insert the
the sealant container. Do not kink the hose. plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on 6. With standby state switched on or the engine
the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐ running, switch on the compressor.
gages audibly.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation
onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel. pressure of approx. 2.0 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire
inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx.
5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this
point.
Checking and adjusting the tire

inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at
least 2 bar must be reached.
315
Removing and stowing the sealant center or another qualified service center or
container repair shop.
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
tainer from the tire valve. reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure
is reached.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
pressor.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐
inside the vehicle.
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
not reached Minimum tire inflation pressure is
1. Pull the connector out of the power socket
reached
inside the vehicle. 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐
ute the sealant in the tire. 2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
side the vehicle.
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
5. With standby state switched on or the engine

running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar can‐
not be reached, contact your dealer's service
316
3. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐

side the vehicle.
Snow chains
Safety information
Warning
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐
tact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
2.0 bar. snow chains.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with
standby state switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor. Warning
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
button on the compressor. tires and vehicle components. There may be a
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ risk of accident or risk of damage to property.
pressor from the tire valve. Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Fine-link snow chains
Continuing the trip The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
of 50 mph/80 km/h. fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
Reinitialize the run-flat tires, refer to page 325. manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
page 318. Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.
tainer of the Mobility System promptly.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 225/55 R 17.
▷ 245/45 R 18.
▷ 245/40 R 19.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
317
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after Safety information

mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in
incorrect readings.
Warning
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐
ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐ The display of the target pressures is not a
sult in incorrect readings. substitute for the tire inflation pressure details
on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire set‐
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
tings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation
Dynamic Traction Control DTC to optimize the
pressure values. In this case, it cannot be guar‐
forward momentum.
anteed that the notification of a loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure will be reliable. There is a risk of
Maximum speed with snow injury and risk of damage to property. Ensure
chains that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are dis‐
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when played correctly and match the details on the
using snow chains. tires and on the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for the
Concept system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system warns you if ▷ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the
there is a loss of pressure in one or more tires. correct details on the mounted tires must be
entered in the tire settings, refer to
page 319.
General information
▷ TPM does not activate until after driving for a
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐
few minutes:
tion pressure and tire temperature.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Using the tire settings in iDrive, the system can
automatically display the specified target pres‐ ▷ After a reset, for tires with special appro‐
sures and compare them with the actual tire in‐ val.
flation pressures. ▷ After changing the tire setting.
If tires are being used that are not specified on ▷ For tires with special approval:
the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle, ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset
refer to page 304, such as tires with special ap‐ was performed with the correct tire infla‐
proval, the system needs to be actively reset. tion pressure.
The system will then take over the actual tire in‐
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
flation pressures as the target pressures.
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐
When operating the system, also note the addi‐ formed.
tional information found in the Tire inflation pres‐
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
sure, refer to page 304, chapter.
318
Tire settings Status display
General information Current status

The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gath‐ The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
ered from the tire inflation pressure details on the trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐
vehicle, refer to page 304, or directly on the tires. tive.
The tire details do not need to be re-entered Via iDrive:
when the tire inflation pressure is corrected.
1. "My Vehicle"
For summer and winter tires, the tire details en‐
2. "Vehicle status"
tered last are stored. After a tire or wheel re‐
placement, the settings of the tire sets used last 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
can be selected. The current status is displayed.
Changing settings Current tire inflation pressure

Via iDrive: The current tire inflation pressure is displayed for
each tire.
1. "My Vehicle"
The current tire inflation pressures may change
2. "Vehicle status"
during driving operation or depending on the ex‐
3. "Tire settings" ternal temperature.
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
5. Selecting tires: Current tire temperature
▷ "Summer tires" Depending on the model, the current tire tem‐
peratures are displayed.
▷ "Winter tires/all-season tires"
The current tire temperatures may change while
6. "Current:"
driving or due to the external temperature.
7. Select the tire type that is mounted on the
rear axle: Target pressure
▷ Tire size, e.g., 245/45 R18 96 Y. The target pressure for the tires on the front and
▷ For tires with special approval: "Other rear axles is displayed.
tire". The specified target pressures take the influence
For further proceeding, see perform a re‐ of driving operation and external temperature on
set section. the tire temperature into account. The appropri‐
8. Select the maximum road speed that will be ate target pressure is always displayed, inde‐
used with the tires. pendent of the weather situation, tire tempera‐
tures and driving times.
9. "Confirm settings"
The displayed target pressure may change and
The measurement of the current tire inflation
may differ from the tire inflation pressure details
pressure is started. The measurement progress
on the door pillar of the driver's door. The tire in‐
is displayed.
flation pressure can thus be corrected to the
value of the displayed target pressures.
The target pressure is immediately adjusted if
the vehicle load is changed in the tire settings.
319
Tire conditions The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐
ing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
General information Monitor…".
Tire and system status are indicated by the color After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire
of the wheels and a SMS text message on the inflation pressures are accepted as the target tire
Control Display. inflation pressures. The reset is completed auto‐
matically while driving.
All wheels green After a successfully completed reset, the wheels
▷ The system is active and bases warnings on on the Control Display are shown in green and
the displayed target pressures. the following is displayed: "Tire Pressure Monitor
active. See label for recommended pressures.".
▷ For tires with special approval: the system is
active and bases warnings on the tire inflation You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you
pressures stored during the last reset. continue the reset resumes automatically.
One to four yellow wheels Messages: for tires without

A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐ special approval
sure has occurred in the indicated tires.
General information
Gray wheels A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
It may not be possible to identify tire inflation Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
pressure losses.
Safety information
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
Warning
▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement,
after confirmation of the tire settings. A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
▷ For tires with special approval: the system is
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
being reset.
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle
For tires with special approval: is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐
performing a reset mation on run-flat tires and continued driving
Via iDrive: with these tires.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status" If a tire inflation pressure check is
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" required
4. Make sure that correct tire settings, refer to
Message
page 319, have been made.
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
5. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
pears on the Control Display.
off.
6. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
7. Drive away.
320
Symbol Possible cause Symbol Possible cause
Inflation was not carried out accord‐ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
ing to specifications, for instance tire inflation pressure.
when the tire has not been suffi‐
ciently inflated or in the case of a
natural steady tire pressure loss. Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Measure Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
mal tires or run-flat tires.
If the tire inflation pressure is too
low Run-flat tires, refer to page 312, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
Message RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
3. Read the description on What to do in case of
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
a flat tire, refer to page 322.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ Messages: for tires with special
sage appears on the Control Display. approval
Symbol Possible cause
General information
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Measure Safety information

1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. Warning
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
station, check the tire inflation pressure in all inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
four tires and correct if necessary. steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
If there is a significant loss of tire accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle
inflation pressure is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving
Message with these tires.

the instrument cluster. If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
Message
trol Display.
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
321
Sym‐ Possible cause 3. Reset the system.

bol
If there is a significant loss of tire
Inflation was not carried out accord‐ inflation pressure
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has
not been sufficiently inflated. Message
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset. In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
No reset was performed for the sys‐ pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
tem. The system issues a warning trol Display.
based on the tire inflation pressures Symbol Possible cause
stored during the last reset.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
Measure tire inflation pressure.
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as No reset was performed for the sys‐
needed. tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
2. Perform a system reset. stored during the last reset.
If the tire inflation pressure is too

Measure
low
Message Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 312, are labeled
sage appears on the Control Display. with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Symbol Possible cause
3. Read the description on What to do in case of
There is a tire inflation pressure loss. a flat tire, refer to page 322.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning Actions in the event of a flat tire
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset. Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Measure
Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. of a flat tire kit.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas For tires with special approval: if the tire infla‐
station, check the tire inflation pressure in all tion pressure in all four tires is correct, the
four tires and correct if necessary.
322
TPM may not have been reset. In this case, external temperature. The driving range may be
perform the reset. less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
If tire damage cannot be found, contact a ing style is used.
dealer’s service center or another qualified If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
service center or repair shop. and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
changing the wheel. to 50 miles/80 km.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. Have
the electronics replaced at the next opportunity. Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
Run-flat tires as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
Safety information ▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Warning Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ curbs or potholes.
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ Final tire failure
ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
Maximum speed Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at ice center or another qualified service center or
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. repair shop.
Continued driving with a flat tire System limits

Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire: Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
temperature.
vers.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tion pressure.
tires at the next opportunity.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
323
Following a temperature-related warning, the tar‐ a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐
get pressures are displayed on the Control Dis‐ hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
play again after a short distance. should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature,
Sudden tire pressure loss your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
damage caused by external circumstances. a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
Failure performing a reset
nates, you should stop and check your tires as
Tires with special approval: the system will not soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
function correctly if a reset was not performed, pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
for example a flat tire may be indicated although tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
the tire inflation pressures are correct. tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐
Malfunction cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note
that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
Message maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
The yellow warning light flashes and is
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
then illuminated continuously. A Check
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Control message is displayed. It may not
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
Measure malfunction indicator is combined with the low
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
mounted: have the wheels checked, if malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
needed. mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked.
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
with the same radio frequency: after leaving illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐
the area of the interference, the system auto‐ tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
matically becomes active again. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
▷ For tires with special approval: the system reasons, including the installation of replacement
was unable to complete the reset. Perform a or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
system reset again. prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
Declaration according to NHTSA/ replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
Monitoring System tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
324
Flat Tire Monitor FTM Performing initialization

When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a flat
Concept
tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss inflation pressures.
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
Do not initialize the system when driving with
tween the individual wheels while driving.
snow chains.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
Via iDrive:
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire. 2. "Vehicle status"
The system does not measure the actual infla‐ 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
tion pressure in the tires.
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of 6. Drive away.
tire inflation pressure is not assured: The initialization is completed while driving,
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐ which can be interrupted at any time.
tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐ The initialization automatically continues when
tion pressure. driving resumes.
▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new
value, an initialization was performed. Messages
Status display General information

The current status of the flat tire monitor can be When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active. bility Control is switched on, if needed.
Via iDrive:
Safety information
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status" Warning
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
The status is displayed. inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
Initialization required can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
An initialization must be performed in the follow‐ accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle
ing situations: is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐ with these tires.
justed.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
325
Indication of a flat tire Run-flat tires

Safety information
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ Warning

sage appears on the Control Display.
The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat
Symbol Possible cause tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
tire inflation pressure.
ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐
cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
Measure
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ Maximum speed
vers.
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 312, are labeled Continued driving with a flat tire
with a circular symbol containing the letters Follow the following when continuing to drive
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

Actions in the event of a flat tire vers.
Normal tires 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
1. Identify the damaged tire. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in
all four tires, for instance using the tire pres‐ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
sure gage of a flat tire kit. correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
tem.
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐
Possible driving range with a
tem.
depressurized tire
If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
The distance for which it may be possible to
sible, please contact a dealer’s service center
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
or another qualified service center or repair
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
shop.
external temperature. The driving range may be
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
changing the wheel. ing style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
to 50 miles/80 km.
326
Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Changing wheels/tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
as the following:
General information
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel
does not always need to be changed immedi‐
▷ Longer braking distances. ately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure
▷ Changed self-steering properties. due to a flat tire.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance available as accessories from a dealer’s service
curbs or potholes. center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ Safety information
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the DANGER
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if
ice center or another qualified service center or all safety measures are observed, there is a risk
repair shop. of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack
tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
System limits life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
The system could be delayed or malfunction in vehicle and do not start the engine.
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in
all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, DANGER
check the tire inflation pressure regularly. Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐ hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in jack to bear weight. They have the potential to
advance. exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐
ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐ supports under the vehicle jack.
face.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels,
high lateral acceleration (drifting). Warning
▷ When driving with snow chains. The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is
provided in order to perform a wheel change in
the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐
signed for frequent use; for example, changing
from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐
quently may cause it to become jammed or
damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Only use the jack to attach
327
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a

breakdown. Warning
Incorrect handling of the vehicle jack can dam‐
age the vehicle's underbody and expose high-
Warning voltage components. There is a risk of injury or
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example risk of damage to property. When cranking up
snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, jacking point next to the wheel housing. Make
change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐ sure not to damage any of the underbody pan‐
sistant surface. eling parts.
Securing the vehicle against

Warning
rolling
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐
cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle
General information
only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any
other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack. The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away
when changing a wheel.
Warning
On a level surface
When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. When
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐
serted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.
Warning Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in

front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall wheel to be changed.
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
328
On a slight downhill gradient 3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug
bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque
is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐ ing on the lug bolt.
hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐
jects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of Preparing the vehicle
both the front and rear axles against the rolling
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
direction.
at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
Lug bolt lock ▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
Concept
position P.
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
which matches the coding.
and ensure that they remain outside the im‐
mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
Overview guardrail.
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.

▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
329
Jacking points for the vehicle Jacking up the vehicle

jack
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
ply with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the vehicle
jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,

and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ your other hand, arrow 2.
cated at the indicated positions.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐

cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
to be changed.
330
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle Mounting a wheel

jack crank or lever clockwise.
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle
manufacturer are mounted, the accompany‐
ing lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or tern.
lever with one hand.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐
vertically and at a right angle beneath the cle.
jacking point.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐
ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area,
if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor panel because of its size.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the portunity and correct as needed.
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack. 4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
est dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is

with the entire surface on the ground and the
relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm
above ground.
331
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 5 Coolant reservoir, engine

2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 6 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling
3 Oil filler neck 7 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
4 Manual unlocking, charging cable 8 Vehicle identification number
332
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Hood
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
Safety information closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the hood is
Warning clear during opening and closing.
Improperly executed work in the engine com‐
partment can damage vehicle components and
impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an NOTICE
accident and damage to property. Have work in Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
the engine compartment performed by a deal‐ hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
er’s service center or another qualified service property. Make sure that the wipers with the
center or repair shop. wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates mov‐ NOTICE
ing components. Certain components in the When the hood is closed, it must engage on
engine compartment can also move with the both sides. Pressing again can damage the
vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into Open the hood again and then close it energet‐
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐ ically. Avoid pressing again.
ing and hair away from moving parts.
Opening
Warning 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
There are protruding parts, for instance locking Hood is unlocked.
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐
ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Stop immediately and correctly close the
hood.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again,
arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
333
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Closing
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
334
Engine oil MOBILITY
Engine oil
NOTICE
options Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
repair shop.
served. Electronic oil measurement

The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐
The engine oil consumption is dependent on ing principles:
your driving style and driving conditions. ▷ Monitoring.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐ ▷ Detailed measurement.
ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
The engine oil consumption can increase in the using a dynamic driving style, for instance when
following situations, for instance: taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a
▷ Sporty driving style. detailed measurement.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
Monitoring
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified Concept
as not suitable.
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
Different Check Control messages appear on the while driving and can be shown on the Control
Control Display depending on the engine oil Display.
level.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
Safety information displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that the en‐
gine oil pressure is too low.
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
335
MOBILITY Engine oil
Functional requirements Performing a detailed measurement

A current measured value is available after ap‐ Via iDrive:
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the com‐
1. "My Vehicle"
bustion engine running.
2. "Vehicle status"
Displaying the engine oil level 3. "Engine oil level"
Via iDrive: 4. "Measure engine oil level"
1. "My Vehicle" 5. "Start measurement"
2. "Vehicle status" The engine oil level is checked and displayed via
a scale.
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
Adding engine oil
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or General information
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
sible to calculate a measured value. In this case,
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to
the measured value for the last, sufficiently long
be added is indicated in the message shown on
trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to

page 337.
Concept Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
state before adding engine oil.
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle
is stationary and displayed via a scale. Take care not to add too much engine oil.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is Safety information
displayed.
Warning
General information Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
creased somewhat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
low the instructions on the containers. Avoid
Functional requirements the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. with operating materials. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
▷ Drive-ready state is activated.
materials out of reach of children.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐
lector lever position N or P and accelerator
pedal not depressed.
▷ The combustion engine is at operating tem‐
perature.
336
Engine oil MOBILITY
Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.

NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ Safety information
property. Immediately add engine oil. NOTICE
Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐
NOTICE tives.
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine NOTICE
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐ Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
ice center or another qualified service center or the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐
repair shop. age to property. When selecting an engine oil,
make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil
rating.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ Suitable engine oil types
partment, refer to page 332.
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating
standards:
Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 333. Oil rating
2. Open the lid counterclockwise. BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
Oil ratings BMW Longlife-14 FE+ and BMW

Longlife-17 FE+ are not suitable for gasoline en‐
gines 50i and 60i.
Alternative engine oil types

3. Add engine oil. If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not
4. Close the lid. available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil
with the following oil rating can be added:
Oil rating
Engine oil types to add
API SL.
General information API SM.

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the API SN.
engine.
337
MOBILITY Engine oil
Viscosity grades
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
Viscosity grade SAE 0W-20 is not suitable for

gasoline engines 50i and 60i.
More information about suitable oil ratings and
viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion
can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐
property. It is recommended that you do not
exceed the service intervals indicated in the ve‐
hicle.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you

have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop change the en‐
gine oil.
338
Coolant MOBILITY
Coolant
Vehicle features and or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives
only.
options
cific and optional features offered with the series. Coolant level
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the General information
The vehicle features two cooling circuits. Always
check the coolant levels of both coolant reser‐
voirs and refill as needed.
served.
Checking the coolant level in the
filler neck
General information 1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 333.
Coolant consists of water and additives.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
Not all commercially available additives are suita‐
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
ble for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of differ‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
ent colors. Observe the water - additive mixing
ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable addi‐ 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
tives is available from a dealer’s service center or 5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
another qualified service center or repair shop. the minimum and maximum marks in the filler
neck.
Safety information
Warning
With the engine hot and the cooling system
open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling
system with the engine cooled down.
6. Close the lid.
Warning Adding
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives 1. Let the engine cool.
can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury
2. Open the hood, refer to page 333.
and risk of damage to property. Do not allow
additives to come into contact with skin, eyes
339
MOBILITY Coolant
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly

counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
6. Close the lid.
7. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated
as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing of
coolant and coolant additives.
340
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle features and General information
options Information on service notifications, refer to
page 150, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Service data in the vehicle key
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the Information on the service notifications is contin‐
selected options or country versions. This also uously stored in the vehicle key. The service
applies to safety-related functions and systems. center can read this data out and suggest a
When using these functions and systems, the maintenance scope for the vehicle.
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle
served. key with which the vehicle was driven most re‐
cently.
BMW maintenance system Storage periods

The maintenance system provides service notifi‐ Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
cations and thereby provides support in main‐ was disconnected are not taken into account.
taining road safety and the operational reliability If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
of the vehicle. another qualified service center or repair shop
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐ update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐ dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated activated-charcoal filter.
separately. Further information is available from a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop. Maintenance Manual and
Service and Warranty
Condition Based Service Information Booklet for US
CBS models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Concept Canadian models
Sensors and special algorithms take into account
the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses Please consult your Maintenance Manual and
these to calculate the need for maintenance. Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
The system makes it possible to adapt the
for Canadian models for additional information on
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
the performance of service and maintenance
user profile.
work.
341
MOBILITY Maintenance
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends Position

that maintenance and repair be performed by a
or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance
and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis
General information There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger checking the primary components in the vehi‐
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐ cle's emissions.
move any devices connected at the OBD socket
before locking the vehicle.
Emissions
Safety information ▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
NOTICE
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐
cumstances:
cate component intended to be used in con‐
junction with specialized equipment to check This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐ in the engine.
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐ Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐ tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
agnosis for other than its intended purpose, engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates ously damage emission control components,
risks of personal and property damage. Given in particular the catalytic converter.
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.
342
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
Vehicle features and not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
options
NOTICE
It also describes features that are not necessarily Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
available in your vehicle, for instance, due to the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
selected options or country versions. This also property. Make sure that the wipers with the
applies to safety-related functions and systems. wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
When using these functions and systems, the the windshield before opening the hood.
served.
Replacing
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper
Vehicle tool kit arms, refer to page 132.
2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the windshield.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the left

storage compartment of the cargo area, under or 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
next to the charging cable. wiper blade, arrow 2.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. 4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on un‐
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the til it you hear it snap into the holder.
wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do 5. Fold down the wipers.
343
MOBILITY Replacing components
Lights and bulbs

Warning
Work on switched-on lighting systems can
General information cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. When working on
Lights and bulbs the lighting system, switch off the lights in
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
to vehicle safety. turer's instructions.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐ Warning
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends look directly into the headlights or other light
that you let a dealer's service center or another sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
qualified service center or repair shop perform
the work in case of a malfunction.
A spare light box is available from a dealer's serv‐ NOTICE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is
repair shop.
a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new
Follow the safety information, refer to page 344. bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth
or something similar, or hold the bulb by its
Headlight glass base.
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐ Front lights
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
light glass does not need to be changed. Adaptive LED headlights
If despite driving with the headlights switched on, Follow the safety information, refer to page 344.
increasing humidity forms, for instance water All lights feature LED technology.
droplets in the light, have the headlights
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's
checked.
or repair shop.
Safety information
LED headlights
Warning
General information
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact
with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk Follow the safety information, refer to page 344.
of injury. Only change bulbs after they have All front lights are designed with LED technol‐
cooled off. ogy, with the exception of the two turn signals.
or repair shop.
344
Turn signal, bulb replacement Tail lights

Follow the safety information, refer to page 344.
21-watt bulb, PY21W. General information
1. In the wheel house, press the two retainer
tabs and fold down the cover. All tail lights are designed with LED technology,
with the exception of the two reversing lights in
the trunk lid.
or repair shop.
Reversing light, bulb replacement
General information
2. Unscrew the bulb holder.
21-watt bulb, H21W.
Without a warning triangle: removing the

panel
1. Opening trunk lid.
2. Press the latch, arrow 1, and remove the
panel, arrow 2.
3. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder,

turn counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Insert the new bulb.
5. Mount the bulb holder.
6. Mount the lid.
LED front fog lights

Follow the safety information, refer to page 344. With a warning triangle: removing the
LED front fog lights are made using LED tech‐ holder
nology. 1. Opening trunk lid.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's 2. Remove, refer to page 351, the warning tri‐
service center or another qualified service center angle.
or repair shop. 3. Press both retainer tabs in the direction of the
arrows, arrows 1, using the screwdriver from
345
the onboard vehicle tool kit and remove the 3. Carefully lift off the hinge cover from the
holder of the warning triangle, arrow 2. hinge arm, arrow 1, until the holding pin, ar‐
row 2, behind the trim panel is released.
Removing the hinge covers 4. Pull the hinge cover downward and remove.
1. Open the two clamps on the hinge cover. 5. Remove the second hinge cover in the same
way.
Removing the interior trim

1. Carefully pry out all eight expanding rivets us‐
ing the screwdriver. Remove the expanding
rivets as described above.
2. On the expanding rivet, carefully pry out the

inside pin by a small distance using a screw‐
driver. Then carefully pry out the expanding
rivet all the way using the screwdriver.
2. Reach into the handle recess on one side and

carefully pull the interior trim downward, ar‐
row 1, to the point where the two holding
pins, arrows 2, behind the interior trim are re‐
leased.
346
3. Proceed accordingly on the other side. Installing the interior trim

4. Carefully release the interior trim from the 1. Connect the cable to the switch unit, if nec‐
trunk lid, arrow 1, and, if necessary, pull the essary. Make sure that the plug engages.
cable with the plug from the switch unit, ar‐ 2. Position the interior trim on the trunk lid and
row 2. secure it with two expanding rivets.
5. Remove the interior trim. 3. Press against the interior trim, arrows, so that
the four holding pins engage in the trunk lid.
Replacing the reversing light
1. Turn the bulb holder in the direction indicated
on the reflector and remove it.
4. Fasten the interior trim using the remaining

expanding rivets and press the pins into the
expanding rivets.
2. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, 5. Attach one side of the hinge cover on the in‐
turn counterclockwise and remove it. terior trim, arrow 1, and fold the hinge cover
3. Mount the bulb holder. onto the hinge arm, arrow 2.
6. Fasten the hinge cover using the expanding

rivet, arrow 1, and press onto the hinge cover
347
so that the holding pin engages in the trunk fied service center or repair shop register the ve‐
lid, arrow 2. hicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has
been replaced. Once the battery has been regis‐
tered again, all comfort features will be available
without restriction and any Check Control mes‐
sages displayed which relate to comfort features
will disappear.
Charging the battery
General information
7. Close the clamps on the hinge cover. Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
8. Attach the other hinge cover accordingly.
usable for its full service life.
9. Fasten the holder for the warning triangle and
attach the warning triangle or mount the A discharged battery is indicated by a red
panel. indicator light.
Charge the battery in the following situations:

Vehicle battery ▷ When the inspection glass on the top of the
battery is black.
▷ When the take-off performance is insufficient.
General information
The following circumstances can have a negative
The battery is maintenance-free.
effect on the performance of the battery:
More information about the battery can be re‐
▷ Frequent short-distance drives.
quested from a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ The vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Safety information
Safety information
Warning
NOTICE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
functions. There is a risk of an accident and work with high voltages and currents, which
damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that means that the 12 volt on-board network can
are compatible with your vehicle type should be be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
installed in your vehicle. Information on com‐ damage to property. Only connect battery
patible vehicle batteries is available at your chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
dealer’s service center. aid terminals in the engine compartment.
Register the battery to the Charging the battery

vehicle Charge the battery only when the engine is off
and via the starting aid terminals, refer to
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
page 355, in the engine compartment.
that you have a service center or another quali‐
348
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to be
newly initialized or individual settings updated, for
example:
▷ With Memory function: store the positions
again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system. Release mounting, arrow, and carefully bend the
trim panel down on the right side.
Disposing of old batteries The fuse box is located on the front right.
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified In the cargo area
service center or repair shop or take The fuses are located in the cargo area on the
them to a collection point. right side behind a cover.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
General information
The fuses are located at different places in the
vehicle. Open the cover on the right side trim.
Information on the fuse types and locations, as

Safety information well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is
available on the Internet: www.bmw.com/fuse‐
Warning card.
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐ Where applicable, information on the fuse types
trical lines and components. There is a risk of and locations is also found on a separate sheet in
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do the fuse box.
not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating. Additional fuse boxes
Additional fuse boxes are located in the vehicle.
In the car's interior service center or another qualified service center
The fuses are located in the car's interior in the or repair shop.
front passenger floor area behind a cover.
349
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop replace the
fuses.
350
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and Warning triangle
options
served. The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the trunk lid.
Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the
Hazard warning flashers cover down, arrow 2.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any expired items promptly.
The button is located in the center console.

Storage
The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐
ard warning flashers are activated.
The first-aid kit is located in the left storage com‐

partment of the cargo area.
351
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐
mitted automatically.
Concept Teleservice Help

Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐ enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle
down. via wireless transmission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it
General information through the Service Specialist.
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐
cle's condition is sent to the vehicle manufac‐ 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
turer. 2. Set the parking brake.
There are various ways of making contact. 3. Control Display is switched on.
▷ Via a Check Control message, refer to 4. "Teleservice Help"
page 148. The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored
▷ Calling with a mobile phone. for specific functions.
▷ Via the BMW Connected app. If this is not possible, further measures will be ini‐
tiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will be
Requirements informed.
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐
nectedDrive services.
BMW Accident Assistance
▷ Cellular network reception.
Concept
BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of an
Starting accident.
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐
port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis. General information
Via iDrive: If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐
1. "ConnectedDrive" ately severe accident, which did not trigger any
airbags, a Check Control message appears on
2. "BMW Assist"
the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐
3. "BMW Roadside Assistance" sage appears on the Control Display.
The contact to the Roadside Assistance of When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,
the manufacture is established. data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
A telephone number is displayed, if needed.
Select to dial the telephone number on a Requirements
connected mobile phone.
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐
Teleservice Diagnosis nectedDrive services.
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless ▷ Cellular network reception.
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
352
▷ Standby state is switched on. The Intelligent Assist system establishes a con‐
nection with the BMW Response Center.
Starting BMW Accident For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
Assistance cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐
tions.
If an accident is detected
automatically Overview
A text message relating to BMW Accident Assis‐
tance appears on the Control Display.
The connection can be established directly:
"BMW Accident Assist."
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
Assistance can also be called up from the stored
Check Control messages, refer to page 148, for
a certain length of time.
Starting manually SOS button.
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐

tacted independently of the automatic accident
detection function.
Via iDrive:
▷ The Assist system is functional.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
2. "BMW Assist" emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
3. "BMW Accident Assistance" the vehicle has been activated.
Follow the displays on the Control Display. A
voice connection is established. Automatic triggering
4. "End call" Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐
The voice connection can be terminated.
cally initiated immediately after an accident of
corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐
Emergency Request ton.
Intelligent emergency call Manual triggering

1. Tap the cover.
Concept
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ in the area of the button illuminates green.
quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐
tem or manually.
gency Request has been initiated.
General information If a cancel prompt appears on the Control

Display, the Emergency Request can be
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
aborted.
353
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until Safety information

the voice connection has been established.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to
Warning
the BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished. Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
The BMW Response Center then makes
ger to life. After an accident, do not touch any
contact with the occupants of the vehicle and
high-voltage components such as orange col‐
initiates further steps to help.
ored high-voltage cables or parts that are in
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW contact with exposed high-voltage cables.
Response Center can take further steps to
help you under certain circumstances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW Re‐ Warning
sponse Center which serves to determine the
Fluids in the high-voltage battery are corrosive.
necessary rescue measures. For instance,
There is a risk of injury. Do not touch fluids es‐
the current position of the vehicle, if it can be
caping from the high-voltage battery.
established.
Even if the BMW Response Center is no lon‐
ger heard through the loudspeakers, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to Jump-starting
hear the occupants of the vehicle.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐ General information
gency Request.
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
What to do after an fully insulated clamp handles.
accident Vehicles with hybrid drive cannot be used for
jump-starting.
General information
After an accident, comply with the following Safety information
safety precautions with regard to the high-volt‐
age system: DANGER
▷ Secure the crash site. Contact with live components can lead to an
▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is ger to life. Do not touch any components that
equipped with a high-voltage system. are under voltage.
▷ Engage selector lever position P, set the
parking brake and switch off operating and
drive-ready state. Warning
▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting. If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐
▷ Do not inhale any gases escaping from the rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk
high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐
safe distance from the vehicle. ing connection.
354
Connecting the cables

NOTICE Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
In the case of body contact between the two electronic systems/power consumers, such as
vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump- the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicle.
starting. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no body contact occurs. 1. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
Preparation battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐ terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐ 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of
formation can be found on the battery. the cable to the positive terminal of the bat‐
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle. tery, or to the corresponding starting aid ter‐
minal of the vehicle to be started.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power con‐
sumers in both vehicles. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
Starting aid terminals body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the vehi‐
cle to be started.
Establishing drive-ready state

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐
ment acts as the battery's positive terminal. 2. Establish the drive-ready state for the vehicle
to be started as usual.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another at‐
tempt in order to allow the discharged battery
to recharge.
3. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
A special nut serves as the negative terminal of

the battery.
355
Tow-starting and towing Tow truck
Safety information
Warning
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
transporting the vehicle Towing other vehicles

The vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
Safety information If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify
the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a
warning triangle in the rear window.
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the Safety information
vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of
damage to property. The vehicle should only be
transported on a loading platform. Warning
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
NOTICE towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not
be possible to control the vehicle's response.
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the
and securing it. gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is
There is a risk of damage to property. heavier than the vehicle to be towed.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur.
Pushing the vehicle
There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐ attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 135.
356
Tow bar The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or

The tow fittings used should be on the same rear of the vehicle.
side on both vehicles. The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tool kit, refer to page 343.
tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐ ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐
lowing: hicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
around corners. only.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
secured with an offset. stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
ting.
Tow rope
Observe the following notes when using the tow Safety information
rope:
▷ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable NOTICE
the vehicle to be towed without jerking. If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
fastening. ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐
▷ Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow low the notes on using the tow fitting.
rope in regular intervals.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of Screw thread for tow fitting
30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
3 miles/5 km.
▷ When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Tow fitting
General information
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 354, if possible.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐
The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried rected by a dealer’s service center or another
in the vehicle. qualified service center or repair shop.
357
MOBILITY Care
Care
NOTICE
options When washing, water can get into the open
charging socket. There is a risk of damage to
property. Close the charging socket flap while
washing.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
served. Safety information
NOTICE
Washing the vehicle When cleaning with high-pressure washers,
components can be damaged due to the pres‐
General information sure or temperatures being too high. There is a
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient
in the area below the windshield when the hood distance and do not spray too long continu‐
is raised. ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
high-pressure washer.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the
vehicle.
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
Safety information
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
Warning
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
Contact with live components can lead to an 31.5 in/80 cm.
electric shock. High voltage is present at the
charging connection. There is a risk of injury or Automatic vehicle washes
danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends Safety information
that work on the charging connection, for in‐
stance cleaning, be performed by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐ NOTICE
ter or repair shop. Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of
damage to property. Follow the following in‐
structions:
358
Care MOBILITY
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or Headlights

those that use soft brushes in order to
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
avoid paint damage.
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
the chassis.
water.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
avoid damage to tires and rims.
scraper.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors. After washing the vehicle
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐ briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
tem. be reduced. The heat generated during braking
dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
Driving into a vehicle wash with a them against corrosion.
Steptronic transmission Completely remove all residues on the windows,
to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
Safety information to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
NOTICE Vehicle care

Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
Vehicle care products
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
General information cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll products are available from a dealer’s service
freely. center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
To roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 135.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
Safety information
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock Warning
the vehicle. Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
Driving out of a vehicle wash risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
Switch on drive-ready state, refer to page 120.
structions on the container.
359
MOBILITY Care
Vehicle paint Clean the upholstery down to the seams using

large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
General information terial vigorously.
Regular care contributes to driving safety and

value retention. Environmental influences in
Safety information
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect NOTICE
the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing
extent of your vehicle care to these influences. can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro®
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ fasteners are closed.
mediately to prevent the finish from being altered
or discolored.
Caring for special components
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable for Light-alloy wheels
vehicles with matte finish. When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do
Leather care not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
instructions.
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe
destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐
in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear
nents, such as the brake disc.
and premature degradation of the leather sur‐
face. After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
To guard against discoloration, such as from
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
against corrosion.
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
Chrome surfaces
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible. Carefully clean components such as the radiator
grille or door handles with plenty of water, possi‐
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
bly with shampoo added, particularly when they
grease will gradually break down the protective
have been exposed to road salt.
layer of the leather surface.
Rubber components
Upholstery material care
Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐
ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only
General information
water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
cleaner.
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐ rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
with a suitable interior cleaner. or noises.
360
Care MOBILITY
Fine wood parts Carpets and floor mats

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft Warning
cloth.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
Kenaf There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using suita‐ vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
ble care products. enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
Plastic components safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
NOTICE
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such curely fastened again after they were removed,
as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐ for instance for cleaning.
ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean The floor mats can be removed from the car's in‐
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly terior for cleaning.
with water, if needed.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐
crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed. in the direction of travel only.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Sensors and camera lenses
Safety belts To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
Warning gent.
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt
webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety
Displays, screens, and protective
belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. glass of the Head-up Display
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
safety belts. NOTICE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
kind can damage the surface of displays and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
screens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
installed belt straps.
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
361
MOBILITY Care
battery will be charged automatically. Make

NOTICE sure that charging is carried out. Regularly
The surface of displays can be damaged with check the charge state.
improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer
property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do than three months with a charge state below
not use any scratching materials. approx. 50 %.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play, refer to page 158, using a microfiber cloth
and commercially available dish-washing soap.
Long idle times and long-term

vehicle storage
Concept
For idle phases that last several weeks, park the
vehicle with the high-voltage battery fully
charged, if possible.
Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days if
the electric range is exhausted.
With storage times of up to three months, if pos‐
sible plug the vehicle into a compatible power
source or park it with the high-voltage battery as
fully charged as possible.
General information
Your dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop can advise you on
what to consider when storing the vehicle for
longer than three months.
Safety information
NOTICE
The high-voltage battery can be damaged if left
uncharged or with low charge for extended pe‐
riods. There is a risk of damage to property. Be‐
fore storing the vehicle for an extended period,
ensure that the high-voltage battery is fully
charged. During the idle period, connect the
vehicle to a charging station at a compatible
charging location. If necessary, the high-voltage
362
Care MOBILITY
363
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the urement method. Detailed values can be found in
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
for instance due to the selected special equip‐ or another qualified service center or repair shop.
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐
model version, equipment or country-specific stance due to the selected special equipment,
measurement method. tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
BMW 5 Series Sedan
Width with mirrors in/mm 83.7/2,126
Width without mirrors in/mm 73.5/1,868
Height in/mm 58.4/1,483
Length in/mm 194.6/4,943
Wheelbase in/mm 117.1/2,975
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.4-40.0/12.0-12.2
364
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
530e
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,335/2,420
Load lbs/kg 805/365
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,469/1,120
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,095/1,404
530e xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,470/2,481
Load lbs/kg 805/365
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,557/1,160
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,095/1,404
Capacities
BMW 5 Series Sedan
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 12.1/46.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, refer

to page 302.
365
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.
Updates made after the

editorial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after the
editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle had closed:
▷ Notes: own safety: maintenance.
▷ Operation: safety: Lane Departure Warning:
warning function.
▷ Driving tips: observe when driving: driving on
a race track.
▷ Mobility: wheels and tires: changing wheels
and tires: changing runflat tires.
▷ Mobility: engine oil: engine oil change.
366
Appendix REFERENCE
367
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 202
Amazon Alexa Car Integration 52
A/C button, see Air conditioning 242 Ambient air package 248
ABS, Antilock Brake System 200 Ambient light 166
Accessories and parts 8 Animal detection, see Night Vision 182
Accident Assistance 352 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 133
Accident prevention, see Active Protection 197 Antilock Brake System, ABS 200
Accident, what to do 354 Anti-slip control, see DSC 200
ACC, see Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go Anti-theft protection, locking 77
function 207 Anti-theft protection, see Lug bolt lock 329
Acoustic pedestrian protection 125 Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to the ve‐
AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging hicle 67
cable 288 Approach control warning with City braking func‐
Activated charcoal filter 245 tion 173
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, Approved axle load 365
ACC 207 Approved total weight 365
Active damping control, see Adaptive suspen‐ Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
sion 240 tertainment, Communication 6
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 172 Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic pedestrian
Active PDC, see Emergency brake function 220 protection 125
Active Protection 197 Ashtray 258
Active seat ventilation 113 Assistance for the combustion engine 125
Adaptive brake assistant 200 Assistance, Roadside, see Roadside Assis‐
Adaptive Light Control 163 tance 352
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dynamics Control 139 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assis‐
Adaptive suspension 240 tant 200
Additives, engine oil types 337 Assistance with breakdown 351
Advance climate control, see Stationary climate AUC Automatic Recirculating Air Control 243
control 251 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Airbags 168 tertainment and Communication 6
Airbags, indicator and warning light 170 AUTO H button, see Parking brake 126
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 244 Automatic activation, see Individual activa‐
Air conditioning 242 tion 113
Air distribution, manual 244 Automatic climate control 241
Air flow, automatic climate control 244 Automatic cruise control with Stop&Go func‐
Air outlets, see Ventilation 245 tion 207
Air pressure, tires 304 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 109
Alarm system 94 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐
Alarm, unintentional 95 bags 170
All-season tires, see Winter tires 311 Automatic headlight control 162
368
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 126 Brake assistant 200

Automatic locking 93 Brake assistant, adaptive 200
Automatic Recirculating Air Control AUC 243 Brake discs, see Brake system 276
Automatic Soft Closing 92 Brake lights, see Lights and bulbs 344
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐ Brake pads, see Brake system 276
mission 134 Brake system 276
Automatic unlocking 93 Braking, information 278
Automatic vehicle wash 358 Breakdown assistance 351
AUTO program, automatic climate control 243 Breakdown, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 325
AUTO program, intensity 243 Breaking in 276
Auto Start/Stop function 122 Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 198
Average speed and average consumption 156 Brightness, Control Display 56
Axle loads, weights 365 Bulb replacement, see Lights and bulbs 344
Buttons on the steering wheel 30
B Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 353
Button, Start/Stop 120
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 103 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 354
Backrest, seats 101
Backrest tilt 102 C
Backrest, width 103
Bandages, see First-aid kit 351 Cable for tow-starting/towing 357
Bar for tow-starting/towing 357 California Proposition 65 Warning 8
Battery, charge state indicator 142 Calling up mirror adjustment 93
BATTERY CONTROL, electric driving 124 Calling up seat adjustment 93
Battery, disposing of 349 Calling up steering wheel adjustment 93
Battery, vehicle 348 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐
Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 356 gent Safety 172
Belts, see Safety belts 104 Camera-based cruise control, see Active Cruise
Beverage holder, see Cup holders 267 Control with Stop&Go function 207
Blind spot collision warning 189 Camera lenses, care 361
Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 97 Camera, rearview camera, without Surround
Bluetooth connection 63 View 223
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Camera, see Surround View 225
Entertainment, Communication 6 Can holder, see Cup holders 267
BMW 360° ELECTRIC Portal, see Intelligent Care, Head-up Display 361
charging 293 Care of displays, screens 361
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Care, see Washing the vehicle 358
Entertainment and Communication 6 Care, vehicle 359
BMW display key 80 Cargo area 270
BMW display key, malfunction 84 Cargo area, enlarging 272
BMW eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 72 Cargo area, enlarging, cargo area floor 274
BMW Gesture Control 47 Cargo area, storage compartments 271
BMW maintenance system 341 Cargo, stowing and securing 271
BMW Wireless Charging, high-voltage bat‐ Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
tery 294 area 271
Bottle holder, see Cup holders 267 Carpet, care 361
369
CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 67 Child restraint system LATCH 117

Car seats, see Transporting children safely 115 Child restraint systems, mounting 116
Cartridge replacement, see Ambient air pack‐ Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil‐
age 248 dren safely 115
Car washing 358 Child safety locks 119
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐ Child seat, mounting 116
tem 277 Child seats, see Transporting children
CBS Condition Based Service 341 safely 115
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Chrome-plated surfaces, care 360
Entertainment and Communication 6 Chrome surfaces, care 360
Center armrest 267 Cigarette lighter 258
Center armrest, front 267 Cigarette lighter, front 259
Center console 32 Cigarette lighter, rear 259
Central Information Display (CID), see Control Cleaning displays, screens 361
Display 40 Cleaning, Head-up Display 361
Central locking system 86 Climate control 241
Central screen, see Control Display 40 Clothes hooks 268
Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8 Coasting 125
Changing parts 343 Combination switch, see Turn signals 129
Changing wheels 327 Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys‐
Changing, wheels and tires 310 tem 130
CHARGE, energy recovery 126 Combustion engine, driving 125
Charge state indicator of the high-voltage bat‐ Comfort Access 86
tery 142 COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 138
Charge state, Onboard Computer 155 Communication, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
Charging cable, storing, see Storage 289 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Charging cable, unlocking manually 290 Comparison of entries, see Entry comparison 38
Charging screen 141 Compartments, doors 266
Charging, see Charging the vehicle 286 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 63
Charging, see Vehicle charging 286 Compressor 314
Charging station, inductive, see BMW Wireless Computer, see Onboard Computer in the instru‐
Charging 294 ment cluster 154
Charging status, see Display of the charging sta‐ Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
tus 291 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Charging the battery, see Vehicle charging 286 Condensation water under the parked vehi‐
Charging the vehicle 286 cle 279
Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charging 286 Condensation, windshield 245
Charging to save fuel 282 Condition Based Service CBS 341
Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless Confirmation signal from the vehicle 93
charging tray 261 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐ gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
ber 12 Connecting, electrical devices, see Sockets 259
Check Control 145 Connecting, mobile devices 62
Checking the engine oil level electronically 335 Consumption, see Current consumption 155
Children, seating position 115 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Children, transporting safely 115 Entertainment, Communication 6
370
Contact with water, hybrid system 74 Defrosting, see Defrosting windshield 245
Container for washer fluid 133 Defrosting, windshield 245
Continued driving with a flat tire 323, 326 Deleting personal data 58
Control Display 40 Departure times, stationary climate control 253
Control Display, settings 54 Destination distance, Onboard Computer 155
Controller 40 Device, connecting 62
Control systems, driving stability 200 Device list 68
Convenient closing, vehicle key 78 Diagnosis connection 342
Convenient opening, vehicle key 77 Digital clock 149
Coolant 339 Dimensions 364
Coolant level 339 Dimmable exterior mirrors 109
Cooling, maximum 243 Dimmable interior mirror 109
Cooling system 339 Direct dial buttons, see Programmable memory
Cornering light 163 buttons 46
Corrosion on brake discs 279 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 129
Cosmetic mirror 258 Display and input 38
Cross traffic warning 237 Display, engine temperature 156
Cruise control 204 Display in the windshield, see Head-up Dis‐
Cruise control, active with Stop&Go func‐ play 158
tion 207 Display key 80
Cruise control with distance control, see Active Display key, malfunction 84
Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 207 Display key, see BMW display key 80
Cruise control without distance control, see Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 165
Cruise control 204 Displays 140
Cruising range 149 Displays and symbols 6
Cup holder 267 Displays, hybrid system 142
Cup holder, front 268 Displays, screens 361
Cup holder, rear 268 Disposal, coolant 340
Current consumption, Onboard Computer, con‐ Disposal, vehicle battery 349
sumption indicator, Onboard Computer 155 Distance control, see PDC 218
Customer service, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ Distance to destination, Onboard Computer 155
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Divided screen view, see Split screen 39
Drive-off assistant 200
D Drive-off assistant, see DSC 200
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 172
Damage, tires 310 Drive-ready state, electric 120
Damping control, active, see Adaptive suspen‐ Drive-ready state, engine start 120
sion 240 Drive-ready state, idle state, and standby
Data memory 9 state 35
Data protection, settings 58 Driver Fatigue Detector 198
Data, see Deleting personal data 58 Driver profiles 59
Data, technical 364 Driver profiles, welcome screen 59
Date 55 Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 172
Daytime running lights 163 Driving comfort 240
DCC, see Cruise control 204 Driving Dynamics Control 138
Deactivation, hybrid system 74 Driving instructions, breaking in 276
371
Driving instructions, hybrid system 282 Emergency unlocking, charging cable 290
Driving mode, ECO PRO 283 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 300
Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 137
trol 138 Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 92
Driving notes, general 277 Energy recovery, CHARGE 126
Driving stability control systems 200 Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 151
Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 284 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 122
Driving through water 277 Engine compartment 332
Driving tips 277 Engine coolant 339
Drying air, see Air conditioning 242 Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic pedestrian
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 200 protection 125
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 202 Engine oil 335
DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Engine oil, adding 336
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Engine oil change 338
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive suspen‐ Engine oil filler neck 336
sion 240 Engine oil types to add 337
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 200 Engine start, jump-starting 354
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 202 Engine start, see Drive-ready state 120
Engine temperature display 156
E Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
eASSIST, assistance for the combustion en‐ tion 6
gine 126 Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
eBOOST, assistance for the combustion en‐ Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐
gine 126 munication 6
ECO PRO 283 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
ECO PRO, Driving style analysis 284 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Entry comparison, navigation 38
Control 138 ePOWER, electric driving 122
ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 138 Equipment, interior 255
eDRIVE button 123 Error displays, see Check Control 145
eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 72 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 200
Electric drive-ready state 120 Evasion Assistant 177
Electric driving, BATTERY CONTROL 124 Exchanging, wheels and tires 310
Electric driving, ePOWER 122 Exhaust gas system 277
Electric driving, MAX eDRIVE 123 Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 277
Electronic oil measurement 335 Exterior lighting during unlocking 77
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 200 Exterior lighting with the vehicle locked 78
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 109
Entertainment, Communication 6 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 109
Emergency brake function when parking, Active Exterior mirrors 108
PDC 220 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 109
Emergency service, see Accident Assis‐ External start 354
tance 352 External temperature 149
Emergency service, see Roadside Assis‐ Eyelet for towing 357
tance 352 Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 271
372
F Fuel quality 302

Fuel recommendation 302
Failure message, see Check Control 145 Fuel, tank capacity 365
False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional Functions, hybrid system 72
alarms 95 Fuses 349
Fan, see Air flow 244
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 104 G
Fatigue alert 198
Filler neck for engine oil 336 Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
Fine wood parts, care 361 Remote Control 255
First-aid kit 351 Gasoline 302
Flat tire, changing wheels 327 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 134
Flat tire, continued driving 323, 326 Gear shift indicator 151
Flat tire message, FTM 325 General driving notes 277
Flat tire message, TPM 321 General settings 54
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 325 Gesture Control 47
Flat tire, repairing 313 Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 47
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 318 Glare shield, see Sun visor 258
Flat tire warning light, FTM 325 Glass sunroof, electric 98
Flat tire warning light, TPM 321 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 100
Flooding 277 Glove compartment 265
Floor carpet, care 361 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 55
Floor mats, care 361 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Fold-away position of the wipers 132 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Foot brake 278
Fording depth 277 H
For Your Own Safety 8
Fragrance cartridge, see Ambient air pack‐ Handbrake, see Parking brake 126
age 248 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 256
Fragrance, see Ambient air package 248 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for
Fragrancing, see Ambient air package 248 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Front airbags 168 Hazard warning flashers 351
Front collision mitigation 173 Head airbags 169
Front fog lights 165 Headlight control, automatic 162
Front fog lights, see Lights and bulbs 344 Headlight courtesy delay feature 162
Front lights, see Lights and bulbs 344 Headlight courtesy delay feature, switching
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐ on 79
vation 170 Headlight flasher 130
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 171 Headlight glass 344
Front seats 101 Headlights, care 359
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 325 Headlights, see Lights and bulbs 344
Fuel 302 Head restraints, front 105
Fuel cap 300 Head restraints, rear 107
Fuel filler flap 300 Head-up Display 158
Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 300 Head-up Display, care 361
Fuel gauge 149
373
Head-up Display, store position, see Memory Indicator and warning lights, see Check Con‐
function 111 trol 145
Heated steering wheel 110 Individual activation 113
Heated steering wheel, individual activation 113 Individual air distribution 244
Heavy cargo, stowing 271 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 59
Height, vehicle 364 Inductive charging of a smartphone, see Wireless
High-beam Assistant 163 charging tray 261
High beams 130 Inductive charging of the high-voltage battery,
High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐ see BMW Wireless Charging 294
tant 163 Inflation pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure
High-voltage battery, charge state indicator 142 Monitor TPM 318
Hills 278 Inflation pressure, tires 304
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 200 Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 325
Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 267 Information 6
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 325
Control 255 Initialization, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 320
Homepage, see Internet 6 Input and display 38
Hood 333 Instrument cluster 140
Horn 30 Instrument lighting 165
Hotel function, trunk lid, see Locking sepa‐ Integrated key 85
rately 92 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 70
Hot exhaust gas system 277 Integrated Universal Remote Control 255
Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight Intelligent charging 293
glass 344 Intelligent emergency call 353
Hybrid system, adapting to the course of the Intelligent Safety 172
road 144 Intended use 8
Hybrid system, at a glance 72 Intensity, AUTO program 243
Hybrid system, automatic deactivation 74 Interior equipment 255
Hybrid system, contact with water 74 Interior lights 165
Hybrid system, displays 142 Interior lights during unlocking 77
Hybrid system, safety 74 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 78
Hybrid system, using efficiently 282 Interior mirror 108
Hybrid system, working on 74 Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 109
Hydroplaning 277 Interior motion sensor 95
Internet connection 66
I Internet hotspot 66
Internet page 6
iBrake – PostCrash 198 Intersection collision warning, see Front collision
Ice warning, see External temperature 149 mitigation 173
Icy roads, see External temperature 149 Interval display, see Service notifications 150
Identification marks, tires 308 IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi‐
Identification number, see Vehicle identification cle 70
number 12 Ionization, see Ambient air package 248
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready
state 35
iDrive 38
374
J Light in the exterior mirror, see Blind spot colli‐

sion warning 189
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 330 Light in the exterior mirror, see Cross traffic
Jam protection system, glass sunroof 99 warning 237
Jam protection system, windows 96 Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 344
Joystick, Steptronic transmission 134 Lights 161
Jump-starting 354 Lights and bulbs 344
Jump-starting terminals 355 Light switch 161
List of all messages 56
K Load 271
Loading 270
Kenaf, care 361 Loading the cargo area, see Stowing cargo 271
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 86 Location, vehicle position 55
Key, mechanical 85 Locking, automatic 93
Key, see BMW display key 80 Locking, see Opening and Closing 76
Key, see Vehicle key 76 Locking, settings 92
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 134 Locking, vehicle key 77
Knee airbag 169 Lock, lug bolts 329
Longer idle times and long-term vehicle stor‐
age 362
L Long-term vehicle storage 362
Low beams 162
Label on recommended tires 311
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐
Lane change assistant 217
tant 163
Lane control assistant, see Steering and traffic
Lower back support 103
jam assistant 214
Lug bolt lock 329
Lane control assistant with active side collision
Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
protection, see Side collision mitigation 193
rack 279
Lane departure warning 186
Lumbar support 103
Lane threshold, warning 186
Language, setting on the Control Display 54
Lashing eyes in the cargo area 271 M
LATCH child restraint fixing system 117
Leather care 360 Maintaining charge state, BATTERY CON‐
LEDs, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 344 TROL 124
Length, vehicle 364 Maintenance 341
Letters and numbers, entering 38 Maintenance requirements, see Condition Based
Level 1 charging 292 Service CBS 341
Level 1 charging cable 288 Maintenance, see Service notifications 150
Level 2 charging cable 288 Maintenance system, BMW 341
License plate light, see Lights and bulbs 344 Make-up mirror 258
Light-alloy wheels, care 360 Malfunction, BMW display key 84
Light control, adaptive 163 Malfunction displays, see Check Control 145
Lighter, cigarettes 258 Malfunction, vehicle key 79
Lighting 161 Managing devices 67
Lighting, speakers 166 Manual air distribution 244
Manual air flow 244
375
Manual brake, see Parking brake 126 N

Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 134
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 300 Navigation data, Onboard Computer 155
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Entertainment and Communication 6
Marking, run-flat tire 312 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 105
Massage seat, front 111 Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 107
Matte finish 360 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels 360
MAX eDRIVE, electric driving 123 New wheels and tires 310
Maximum cooling 243 Night Vision device, see Night Vision 182
Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
Info 151 tion 182
Maximum speed of winter tires 311 No-touch opening and closing of the trunk lid 88
Measurement, units of 55 Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 357
Media of the Owner's Manual 70
Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 351 O
Memory function 111
Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection OBD Onboard Diagnosis 342
lists 153 Object detection, see Night Vision 182
Menus, operating, iDrive 38 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 224
Messages 56 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
Messages, see Check Control 145 grade 303
Microfilter 245 Odometer and trip odometer 154
Minimum tread depth, tires 309 Oil 335
Mirror 108 Oil, adding 336
Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐ Oil change 338
cle 277 Oil change interval, see Service notifications 150
Mobile devices, managing 67 Oil filler neck 336
Mobile phone, connecting 62 Oil level, checking electronically 335
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ Oil types to add, engine 337
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Onboard Computer in the instrument clus‐
Mobility System 313 ter 154
Mode, ECO PRO 283 Onboard Computer on the Control Display 157
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Onboard Diagnosis OBD 342
Safety 8 Onboard literature, printed 70
Monitor, see Control Display 40 Onboard vehicle tool kit 343
Mounting of child restraint systems 116 On-call service, see Accident Assistance 352
MP3 player, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ On-call service, see Roadside Assistance 352
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Opening and closing 76
Multi-function hook 271 Operating concept, iDrive 38
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 30 Operating via the Controller 42
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Operation via touchscreen 44
Entertainment and Communication 6 Outside air, see AUC 243
Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐ Overwintering, care 362
igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Owner's Manual, printed 70
376
P Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 40
Paint, vehicle 360 Q

Pairing, mobile devices, see Connections 62
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 94 Queuing Assistant, see Steering and traffic jam
Panic mode 94 assistantTraffic Jam Assist, see Steering and
Panorama View, see Surround View 225 traffic jam assistant 214
Parallel Parking Assistant 232 Quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging ca‐
Park Distance Control PDC 218 ble 288
Parked vehicle ventilation, see Stationary climate
control 251 R
Parking aid, see PDC 218
Parking Assistant 232 Racing track 280
Parking Assistant Plus, see Surround View 225 Radiator fluid 339
Parking Assistant, see Parking Assistant 232 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Parking, Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 126 tertainment and Communication 6
Parking brake 126 Rain sensor 131
Parking lights 161 Rear automatic climate control 247
Parts and accessories 8 Rear collision preparation 196
Passenger's side mirror, tilting, see Automatic Rear collision warning, see Rear collision prepa‐
Curb Monitor 109 ration 196
Pathway lines, rearview camera 224 Rear lights, see Lights and bulbs 344
PDC Park Distance Control 218 Rear seat backrests, folding down 272
Pedestrian detection, see Night Vision 182 Rearview camera, see Surround View 225
Pedestrian protection, acoustic 125 Rearview camera, without Surround View 223
Performance display, see Sport displays 157 Rearview mirrors, exterior 108
Personal data, deleting 58 Rearview mirrors, interior 109
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 59 Rear window defroster 245
Person warning with City braking function 180 Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activated-
Phone, connecting 62 charcoal filter 245
Plastic parts, care 361 Recirculated-air mode 244
PostCrash – iBrake 198 Recommended fuel grade 303
POWER, driving with combustion engine 125 Recommended tire brands 311
Power failure 349 Refueling 299
Power windows 96 Regular charging 282
Pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure Monitor Remote 3D View 231
TPM 318 Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐
Pressure, tires 304 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
Pressure warning FTM, tires 325 cation 6
Printed onboard literature 70 Remote control, see Vehicle key 76
Profiles, see Driver profiles 59 Remote control, universal 255
Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 46 Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook
Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam pro‐ for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tection system 99 tion 6
Protective function, windows, see Jam protec‐ Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 344
tion system 96
377
Replacing light-emitting diodes, see Lights and Safety systems, see Airbags 168
bulbs 344 Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 172
Replacing parts 343 Saving fuel 281
Replacing the battery, vehicle key 79 Screen, see Control Display 40
Replacing, wheels and tires 310 Screwdriver, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 343
Reporting safety malfunctions 13 Sealant, see Mobility System 313
RES CNCL button, see Active Cruise Control Search for charging stations, see Owner's
with Stop&Go function 207 Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Commu‐
RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 204 nication 6
Reserve warning, see Range 149 Seat heating 112
Resetting, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 320 Seat heating, individual activation 113
Retreaded tires 311 Seating position for children 115
Reversing lights, bulb replacement, see Lights Seats, front 101
and bulbs 344 Seat ventilation, active 113
Roadside Assistance 352 Seat ventilation, individual activation 113
Roadside Assistance, see Accident Assis‐ Securing, cargo 271
tance 352 Selection list in instrument cluster 153
Roadside parking lights 162 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 134
Roller sunblind, rear window 97 Self-supporting tires, see Run-flat tires 312
Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 98 Sensors, care 361
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 256 Service and warranty 9
RON recommended fuel grade 303 Service Center, see Accident Assistance 352
Roofliner 34 Service notifications 150
Roof-mounted luggage rack 279 Service requirements, see Condition Based
Rope for tow-starting/towing 357 Service CBS 341
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐
RSC Run-flat System Component, see Run-flat tion 6
tires 312 SET button, see Active Cruise Control with
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Stop&Go function 207
tertainment, Communication 6 SET button, see Cruise control 204
Rubber components, care 360 Set speed, see Active Cruise Control with
Run-flat tire 312 Stop&Go function 207
Settings, Control Display 54
S Settings, locking/unlocking 92
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 134
Safe braking 278 Side airbag 168
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front Side collision mitigation 193
passenger seat 105 Side protection without Surround View 221
Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 105 Signaling, horn 30
Safety belts 104 Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig‐
Safety belts, care 361 nals from the vehicle 93
Safety, hybrid system 74 Sitting safely 101
Safety locks, doors, and windows 119 Sizes, see Dimensions 364
Safety package, see Active Protection 197 Ski and snowboard bag 275
Safety switch, windows 97 Slide/tilt glass roof, see Glass sunroof 98
378
Smallest turning radius 364 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for
Smartphone, connecting 62 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Status control display, tires 320
Entertainment and Communication 6 Status field symbols 39
Smartphone, using via voice activation 52 Status information, iDrive 39
Smoker's package 258 Status of Owner's Manual 7
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐ Status, vehicle 158
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Steering and traffic jam assistant 214
cation 6 Steering wheel, adjusting 110
SMS text message, supplementary 148 Steering wheel, buttons 30
Snow chains 317 Steptronic transmission 134
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis 342 Storage, charging cable 289
Sockets 259 Storage compartment in the center console 267
Software update 69 Storage compartments, cargo area 271
SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 353 Storage compartments, locations 265
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Storage, tires 312
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Store Mirror position, see Memory function 111
Speaker lighting 166 Store seat position, see Memory function 111
Special equipment, see Vehicle features and op‐ Store steering wheel position, see Memory func‐
tions 7 tion 111
Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 151 Storing the vehicle 362
Speed Limit Info 151 Stowing, cargo 271
Speed, see Average speed and average con‐ Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
sumption 156 area 271
Speed warning 157 Suitable devices 63
Split screen 39 Suitable mobile phones 63
Sport displays 157 Summer tires, tread 309
SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Sun visor 258
Control 138 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 70
Sport program, Steptronic transmission 134 Supplementary SMS text message 148
SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 138 Surround View 225
Stability control systems 200 Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics Con‐
Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charging trol 138
cable 288 Switches, see Cockpit 30
Standard charging, see Level 1 charging 292 Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dynam‐
Standard equipment, see Vehicle features and ics Control 138
options 7 Switching off the engine, see Drive-ready
Standby state, idle state and drive-ready state 120
state 35 Symbols and displays 6
Start/stop, automatic function 122 SYNC program, automatic climate control 245
Start/Stop button 120
Starting aid terminals 355 T
Starting, see Drive-ready state 120
Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 120 Tail lights, see Lights and bulbs 344
Stationary climate control 251 Tank unlocking, see Tank vent 299
Tank vent 299
379
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 8 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 318
Technical data 364 Traction control 202
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, TRACTION, driving dynamics 202
Entertainment and Communication 6 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 137
Temperature, automatic climate control 242 Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 134
Temperature display, engine 156 Transporting children safely 115
Temperature display, see External tempera‐ Travel information, see Onboard Computer on
ture 149 the Control Display 157
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 94 Tread, tires 309
Thermal camera, see Night Vision 182 Trip computer 157
Thigh support 102 Triple turn signal activation 129
Through-loading system 272 Trip odometer 154
Tilt alarm sensor 95 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 154
Tilt, backrest 102 Trunk, emergency unlocking 92
Tilting, passenger's side mirror, see Automatic Trunk lid 90
Curb Monitor 109 Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 92
Time 54 Trunk lid, hotel function, see Locking sepa‐
Time of arrival, Onboard Computer 155 rately 92
Tire brands, recommended 311 Trunk lid, opening and closing with no-touch ac‐
Tire damage 310 tivation 88
Tire identification marks 308 Trunk lid, see Trunk lid 90
Tire inflation pressure 304 Trunk lid, vehicle key 78
Tire inflation pressure monitor, see FTM Flat Turning circle 364
Tire Monitor 325 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 224
Tire pressure 304 Turn signal, indicator light 147
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 318 Turn signals, bulb replacement, see Lights and
Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 313 bulbs 344
Tires and wheels 304 Turn signals, high beams, headlight flasher 129
Tires, changing 310
Tire sealant, see Mobility System 313 U
Tire settings 319
Tires, run-flat 312 Unintentional alarm, avoiding 95
Tire tread 309 Units of measurement 55
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐ Universal remote control 255
tainment and Communication 6 Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 134
Tool 343 Unlocking, automatic 93
Torque display, see Sport displays 157 Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 76
Touchpad 45 Unlocking, settings 92
Touchscreen 44 Unlocking, vehicle key 77
Tow bar 357 Updates made after the editorial deadline 7
Tow fitting 357 Update, software 69
Towing 356 Upholstery material care 360
Tow rope 357 Upper backrest, front 103
Tow-starting 356 USB connection 65
380
USB interface, position in vehicle 260 Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Blind
Used battery, disposing of 349 spot collision warning 189
Use, intended 8 Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Cross
traffic warning 237
V Warning messages, see Check Control 145
Warning triangle 351
Vanity mirror 258 Warranty 8
Vehicle battery 348 Washer fluid 133
Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis‐ Washer nozzles, windshield 132
tance 351 Washer system 130
Vehicle, breaking in 276 Washing the vehicle 358
Vehicle care 359 Water, hybrid system 74
Vehicle care products 359 Water on roads 277
Vehicle features and options 7 Water, see Condensation water under the parked
Vehicle identification number 12 vehicle 279
Vehicle key, additional 79 Website, see Internet 6
Vehicle key, integrated key 85 Weights 365
Vehicle key, loss 79 Welcome light during unlocking 77
Vehicle key, malfunction 79 Welcome lights 162
Vehicle key, opening/closing 76 Welcome screen, driver profiles 59
Vehicle key, replacing the battery 79 Wheelbase, vehicle 364
Vehicle key with display, malfunction 84 Wheel cleaner, light-alloy wheels 360
Vehicle key with display, see BMW display Wheels and tires 304
key 80 Wheels, changing 310
Vehicle paint 360 Wheels, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 325
Vehicle position, vehicle location 55 Width, vehicle 364
Vehicle status 158 WiFi connection 66
Vehicle wash 358 WiFi hotspot, see Internet connection 66
Vehicle wash, automatic 358 Window, defrosting 245
Vehicle, washing 358 Windows, powered 96
Ventilation 245 Windshield, defrosting 245
Venting, see Stationary climate control 251 Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 133
Venting, see Ventilation 245 Windshield washer nozzles 132
Vent, see Ventilation 245 Windshield washer system, see Washer/wiper
Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ system 130
tertainment and Communication 6 Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 130
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 12 Winter storage, vehicle 362
Voice activation 50 Winter tires 311
Voice activation system 50 Winter tires, tread 309
Voice command response 50 Wiper blades, replacing 343
Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 133
W Wiper, fold-away position 132
Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 130
Warning against cross traffic 237 Wiper system 130
Warning and indicator lights, see Check Con‐ Wireless Charging, high-voltage battery, see
trol 145 BMW Wireless Charging 294
381
Wireless charging of a smartphone, see Wireless

charging tray 261
Wireless charging of the high-voltage battery,
see BMW Wireless Charging 294
Wireless charging tray for smartphones 261
Wood parts, care 361
Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 38
Working in, engine compartment 333
Working on, hybrid system 74
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 343
xDrive 202
382
*BL291384900M*
01402913849 ue
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL291384900M*
01402913849 ue

2020 BMW 5 Series 2

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

2020 BMW 5 Series 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2020 BMW 5 Series 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402913849 - X/19

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the

© 2019 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Additional sources of Symbol Meaning

information Precautions that must be followed in

Symbol Meaning Vehicle features and

Windshield You can also obtain other information about mo‐

For Canadian customers

The vehicle identification number can also be

Reporting safety defects

Buttons for the central locking

Comfort Access Opening and closing the trunk lid

Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.

Locking the vehicle

Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐

Depending on the setting, the doors may also Driver's door

Without automatic tailgate

With automatic tailgate operation:

1 Light switch element

iDrive Terminating the voice activation

Buttons on the Controller

Press once: calls up the main menu.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Press once: opens the previous dis‐

Opens the Options menu.

Activating the voice activation

1. Press the button on the steering

If no other commands are possible, operate the

Set-up and use

▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐

Adjusting the height: power head

Fold the side extensions forward to increase lat‐

Push switch up or down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors Storing

2. Press button on the door. The writ‐

Electrical steering wheel adjustment

1 Changing the entertainment source

3. "State/Province?" 5. Select the functions for which the mobile

Connecting a mobile phone Accepting a call

Dialing a number Select CarPlay as the function:

4. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐

1. Press the button.

Apple CarPlay preparation

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Switching off drive-ready state Steptronic transmission

Auto Start/Stop function

Releasing the selector lever lock

Activate the Sport program/manual mode:

Press the button. End the sport program/manual mode:

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.